Hitachi DZ HS303A User Manual

DZ-HS303A/DZ-HS300A  
DZ-HS303A  
DZ-HS300A  
Instruction manual  
Toobtainthebestperformanceandensureyearsof  
trouble-free use, please read this instruction  
manual completely.  
Warning: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Caution to the user: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer void  
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
®
®
®
®
®
Microsoft , Windows , Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, and Windows XP are  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
®
®
®
Intel , Pentium Processor, and Celeron Processor are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
IBM and PC/AT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
®
®
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Other company names and product names listed are trademarks or brand names belonging to each  
individual company.  
SD logo is a trademark.  
3
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
In addition to the careful attention devoted to quality standards in the manufacture of your video product, safety is a  
major factor in the design of every instrument. But, safety is your responsibility too.  
This page lists important information that will help to assure your enjoyment and proper use of DVD video camera/  
recorder and accessory equipment.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Read these instructions.  
Keep these instructions.  
Heed all warnings.  
Follow all instructions.  
Do not use this apparatus near water.  
Clean only with dry cloth.  
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
8
9
Do not install near any heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus  
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the  
apparatus.  
10 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
11 Use only with the cart, stand,  
tripod, bracket, or table specified  
by the manufacturer, or sold with  
the apparatus. When a cart is  
used, use caution when moving  
the cart/apparatus combination to  
avoid injury from tip-over.  
12 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
when unused for long periods of time.  
13 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been  
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or  
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects  
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has  
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate  
normally, or has been dropped.  
14 The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or  
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids,  
such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
15 The equipment (AC Adapter/Charger) shall be  
used near the socket-outlet and shall be easily  
accessible.  
4
Cautions on HDD  
Save the data recorded on HDD:  
To back up the data recorded on HDD, save it on a DVD. It is also recommended that you use this  
DVD video camera/recorder to dub the data. You can also use a PC to save the data on a DVD.  
It is recommended that you periodically save your recordings.  
Do not subject the DVD video camera/recorder to any vibrations or impact:  
This could result in the HDD not being recognized or recording, playback or dubbing to become  
impossible.  
Do not subject this DVD video camera/recorder to any vibrations or impact especially during  
recording, playback or dubbing, or while the ACCESS/PC indicator is lit or blinking.  
If vibrations to this DVD video camera/recorder are repeated, or the drop status of DVD video  
camera/recorder is detected (see page 69), recording, playback or dubbing will stop to protect the  
HDD in this DVD video camera/recorder.  
Carefully check the temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder:  
If the temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder is too high or too low, normal recording or  
playback may not be possible.  
If the power switch is set to “HDD” with the temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder too  
high or too low, message “The temperature of HDD is outside the operating temperature range.  
Turn off power.” may appear to protect the HDD. Even if this happens, setting the power switch to  
“DVD” may allow you to use the DVD video camera/recorder with a DVD, so it is recommended  
that you carry a spare DVD even if you intend to record on the HDD.  
This DVD video camera/recorder cannot be used at high altitude:  
Note that the DVD video camera/recorder cannot be used in a place where the atmospheric  
pressure is low, such as 3,000 meters or more above sea-level.  
Do not place this DVD video camera/recorder near a magnet or magnetic field:  
If you so, recording, playback or dubbing may not be possible.  
Please note in advance that Hitachi will not accept any liability or make compensation for loss  
of data, or direct or indirect damage when recording or playback is not performed normally  
due to a fault in this DVD video camera/recorder. This also applies to repairs on this DVD  
video camera/recorder (including repair of components other than HDD).  
Cautions When Using  
Hitachi cannot compensate for any damages caused when recording is not made normally or  
recorded contents cannot be played back because of a defect in the DVD video camera/  
recorder, disc or card. Also, Hitachi cannot be responsible for your recorded video and audio.  
If you or a third party make a mistake when handling this DVD video camera/recorder, disc,  
card, etc., the recorded contents may be lost. We cannot be responsible for compensation for  
damage due to loss of recorded contents.  
Handle the liquid crystal display (LCD) with care:  
The LCD is a very delicate display device: Do not press its surface with force, hit it or prick it with  
a sharp object.  
If you push the LCD surface, unevenness in display may occur. If unevenness does not disappear  
soon, turn the DVD video camera/recorder off, wait for a few moments, and then turn it on again.  
Do not place the DVD video camera/recorder with the open LCD screen down.  
Close the LCD monitor when not using the DVD video camera/recorder.  
5
Liquid crystal display (LCD) and viewfinder:  
The LCD screen and viewfinder are the products of highly precise technology. Among the total  
number of pixels (approx. 120,000 pixels for LCD monitor and equivalent to approx. 200,000 pixels  
for viewfinder), 0.01% or less pixels may be missing (black dots) or may remain lit as colored dots  
(red, blue, green). This shows the limitations of the current technology, and does not indicate a  
fault that will interfere with recording.  
The LCD screen and viewfinder will be slightly dimmer than usual when the DVD video camera/  
recorder is at low temperature, as in cold areas, or immediately after power is turned on. Normal  
brightness will be restored when the temperature inside the DVD video camera/recorder rises.  
Hold the DVD video camera/recorder correctly:  
Do not hold the viewfinder or LCD monitor when lifting the DVD video camera/recorder: The  
viewfinder or LCD monitor could detach and the DVD video camera/recorder may fall.  
Do not subject the DVD video camera/recorder to impact:  
This DVD video camera/recorder is a precision machine. Take great care that you do not strike it  
against a hard object or let it fall.  
When using a tripod, firmly secure the DVD video camera/recorder on it. Do not use the DVD  
video camera/recorder with a tripod in a place where it is subject to severe vibrations or impact.  
No sand or dust!  
Fine sand or dust entering the DVD video camera/recorder or AC adapter/charger could cause  
malfunctions or defects.  
No water or oil!  
Water or oil entering the DVD video camera/recorder or AC adapter/charger could cause electric  
shock, malfunctions or defects.  
Heat on surface of product:  
The surfaces of the DVD video camera/recorder, AC adapter/charger and battery will be slightly  
warm, but this does not indicate a fault.  
Screen on connected TV:  
Never leave the Disc Navigation screen, still image or camera image displayed on your TV to  
which the DVD video camera/recorder is connected: Doing so could result in displayed image  
retention or phosphor degradation of TV screen.  
Be careful of ambient temperature:  
If the temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder is too high or too low, normal recording/  
playback may not be possible.  
Take care that the temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder, when connected to PC does  
not rise excessively (reference for usage: approx. 30 minutes at about 86ºF (30ºC).  
Do not leave the DVD video camera/recorder on beach sand or in a closed vehicle where the  
temperature is very high for a long time: This could cause malfunctions.  
Do not point directly at the sun:  
If direct sunlight strikes the lens or viewfinder, the DVD video camera/recorder could malfunction  
or a fire could occur.  
Do not leave the DVD video camera/recorder with the LCD screen exposed to direct sunlight: This  
could cause malfunctions.  
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder near TV or radio:  
This could cause noise to appear on the TV screen or in radio broadcasts.  
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder near strong radio waves or magnetism:  
If the DVD video camera/recorder is used near strong radio waves or magnetism, such as a radio  
wave tower or electric appliances, recording or playback may stop, or noise could enter the video  
and audio that are being recorded. During playback of normally recorded video and audio, noise  
may also be present in picture and sound.  
At worst the DVD video camera/recorder could malfunction.  
Do not expose the DVD video camera/recorder to soot or steam:  
Thick soot or steam could damage the DVD video camera/recorder case or cause malfunctions.  
6
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder near corrosive gas:  
If the DVD video camera/recorder is used in a place where there is dense exhaust gas generated  
by gasoline or diesel engine, corrosive gas such as hydrogen sulfide, or sulfur such as in a hot  
spring area, the external or internal terminals could corrode, which would disable normal  
operation, or the battery connecting terminals could corrode, so power will not turn on.  
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder near ultrasonic humidifier:  
With some water in humidifier, calcium and other chemicals dissolved in water could scatter in the  
air, and white particles could adhere to the optical head of the DVD video camera/recorder, which  
could cause it to operate abnormally.  
Do not expose the DVD video camera/recorder to insecticide:  
Insecticide entering the DVD video camera/recorder could dirty the lens in laser pickup block for  
DVD, and in such a case the DVD video camera/recorder might not operate normally. Turn the  
DVD video camera/recorder off and cover it with vinyl sheet, etc. before using insecticide.  
Do not use a generally available 8 cm CD lens cleaner:  
Cleaning the DVD lens is not necessary when using this DVD video camera/recorder in the usual  
way.  
Using 8 cm CD lens cleaner could cause this DVD video camera/recorder to be faulty.  
If you have to clean the lens, use a Hitachi Maxell cleaner that is exclusively for 8 cm DVD discs.  
Be careful of moisture condensation:  
When you move the DVD video camera/recorder between places where the difference in  
temperatures is great – such as entering a lodge from a ski slope or going out of a cooled room or  
vehicle – condensation (vapor in air warmed or cooled to water droplets) could occur on the lens  
and/or inside the DVD video camera/recorder. If condensation occurs, do not open the cover of  
disc or card insertion block if possible. If condensation occurs on the lens, wipe it off with a soft,  
dry cloth. Even if the external surface of DVD video camera/recorder has dried, condensation may  
remain inside: Turn the DVD video camera/recorder off and leave it in a dry place for at least 1 – 2  
hours before using it again.  
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder for a long uninterrupted period of time:  
This DVD video camera/recorder cannot be used for a long time continuously as a surveillance  
camera/monitor. If you use it for a long continuous period of time, the temperature of DVD video  
camera/recorder could exceed the limit and the recording/playback operation may slow down or  
other faults could occur. If this happens, turn it off and wait for a while before using it again.  
7
Do not turn the DVD video camera/recorder off while the ACCESS/PC indicator or  
CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or blinking:  
The ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or  
ACCESS/PC  
blinking to show that data is being written to disc or card, indicator  
or being read from it. At this time, do not do any of the  
following, so as not to damage the data:  
Remove battery  
Disconnect AC adapter/charger  
Plug or unplug PC connection cable  
Remove disc or card  
Subject DVD video camera/recorder to severe  
vibrations or impact  
Violently open or close the LCD monitor  
The ACCESS/PC indicator will light for a while after  
recording is finished. While it is lit, do not subject the DVD  
video camera/recorder to any vibration or impact, and do  
not disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger.  
If you turn the DVD video camera/recorder off while the  
ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or blinking,  
turn it on again with the disc or card loaded in it: Repair of  
the disc or card will be executed automatically (see page 139).  
CARD ACCESS indicator  
Do not wipe the DVD video camera/recorder case with benzene or thinner:  
The coating of case could peel off or the case surface could deteriorate.  
When using a chemical cleaning cloth, follow the instructions.  
Also read the instructions attached with optional accessories:  
For optional accessories, observe the cautions and follow instruction manuals attached.  
The battery provided has not been charged at time of purchase:  
Charge it before using the DVD video camera/recorder (see page 29).  
The battery will discharge as time passes. (The battery is produced so that it discharges on its own  
in order to protect its characteristics.)  
Disc cannot be inserted or removed unless a charged battery or AC adapter/  
charger is connected to the DVD video camera/recorder.  
Be sure to set the power switch to “OFF” when turning the DVD video camera/  
recorder off:  
Disconnecting the battery or AC adapter/charger while the DVD video camera/recorder is being  
powered could cause a fault.  
8
Cautions When Storing  
Do not leave the DVD video camera/recorder in a place where the temperature is  
very high for a long period of time:  
The temperature inside a closed vehicle or trunk can become very high in a hot season. If you leave  
the DVD video camera/recorder in such a place, it could malfunction or the case could be  
damaged. Also, do not expose the DVD video camera/recorder to direct sunlight or place it near a  
heater.  
Do not store the DVD video camera/recorder in a place where the humidity is high  
or in a dusty place:  
Dust entering the DVD video camera/recorder could cause malfunctions. If the humidity is high,  
the lens could be moldy, and the DVD video camera/recorder could become inoperable. It is  
recommended that you put the DVD video camera/recorder with desiccant in a box when storing  
it in a closet, etc.  
Do not store the DVD video camera/recorder in a place subject to strong  
magnetism or intense vibrations:  
This could cause malfunctions.  
Detach the battery from the DVD video camera/recorder and store it in a cool place:  
Leaving the battery attached or storing it at high temperature could shorten its life.  
Suggestions and Restrictions  
Make a trial recording:  
Always make a trial recording before doing actual recording to make sure that recording is normal.  
The data that have not been stored normally because of a defect in the DVD video camera/  
recorder cannot be restored.  
It is recommended that you use the HDD from which recorded contents can be deleted for trial  
recording.  
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder for professional applications:  
This DVD video camera/recorder is designed and produced for home-use recording and playback.  
Copyright:  
Data recorded on the HDD/disc/card in this DVD video camera/recorder using other digital/  
analog media or devices are protected by the copyright act and cannot be used without permission  
of the owner of copyright, except for personal enjoyment. Be aware that recording is restricted for  
some demonstrations, performances and exhibitions, even for personal enjoyment.  
9
CLEANING  
Be sure to set the power switch to “OFF” before cleaning this DVD video camera/recorder.  
Cleaning LCD screen and camera  
lens  
Cleaning DVD Video Camera/  
Recorder Case  
Use dry, soft cloth to wipe dirt off. When  
cleaning the LCD screen, be careful not to use  
force, scratch it, or subject it to impact: Doing  
such could cause a defect in the screen, result in  
display unevenness, or damage the LCD  
monitor.  
If dust adheres to the viewfinder  
lens, remove it using a cotton  
swab, etc.  
Do not wipe the DVD video camera/recorder  
case hard with any foreign object, such as grit,  
adhering to it, and do not use rough fabrics to  
clean the case: Doing so could scratch it.  
Use soft cloth, etc. to gently wipe dirt off the case.  
Do not use benzene or thinner to  
clean DVD video camera/recorder  
case  
The coating of case could peel off or the case  
could deteriorate. Wipe off dirt on the case with  
a soft cloth which has been completely wrung  
out. When using chemical cleaning cloth, follow  
instructions for use.  
Do not rub the lens with force: Doing so could  
scratch the lens.  
HANDLING DISCS  
When recording images,  
Using discs  
Al  
l
Pr ogr a  
m
s
001 / 002  
the DVD video camera/  
recorder may avoid the  
portions of disc where  
recording is not possible,  
due to dust, scratches,  
etc. [It will pause m at  
such a portion and  
Discs are very delicate recording media.  
Carefully read the following cautions and  
observe them:  
Always use a brand new disc when recording  
important material.  
Be sure not to touch the recording surface of  
disc, or dirty or scratch it.  
If there is dust, scratch, dirt on disc or if it is  
warped, the following phenomena may occur:  
Block noise in playback  
image  
Momentary stop of  
playback image  
PLAY  
PHOTO SELECT  
(Recording one scene  
may produce multiple  
thumbnails.)  
automatically restart  
recording (n).]  
This will cause recording to be interrupted for  
several seconds to several minutes, and  
multiple thumbnails will be created by one  
recording session as shown above. In this case,  
the recordable time on disc will decrease.  
Be careful when removing the disc since the  
metal of removal slot of DVD video camera/  
recorder, and disc itself, may be hot.  
Sound interrupted during  
playback, or abnormal  
sound  
Block noise  
Blue thumbnail  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
m
s
001/ 006  
display* (Fig. 1)  
Disc cannot correctly  
be recognized  
Disc cannot be  
initialized  
Storing discs  
When storing disc, replace it in the plastic case  
in which it was purchased.  
Be careful that no condensation occurs on disc.  
Do not place disc in following places:  
Direct sunlight for a long time  
Where humidity is high or in dusty place  
Where there is heat from a heater, etc.  
LAY  
PHOTO SELECT  
Fig. 1  
*
Delay between video  
and audio  
Even if disc is normal, the above phenomena  
may occasionally occur. While the ACCESS/  
PC indicator is lit, do not subject disc to  
vibrations or impact, and avoid using DVD  
video camera/recorder at extremely high or  
low temperatures, or in environment where  
condensation is likely to occur.  
10  
DISC CLEANING  
Use the disc cleaning cloth provided to lightly  
wipe off any dirt adhering to the disc as shown  
in the figure. Do not wipe the disc with force:  
Doing so could cause scratches.  
Never use solvent (thinner, water, antistat or  
detergent) for cleaning.  
Use the disc cleaning  
cloth to clean from inner  
to outer edges in axial  
direction.  
Lightly wash the dirty cleaning cloth with  
detergent: The dirt removal capacity of the cloth  
will improve (rinse the cloth well with water so  
that no detergent remains).  
NOTE WHEN TRANSFERRING OR DISCARDING DISCS AND SD MEMORY CARDS  
The “Format” function on this DVD video camera/recorder will only change the file control information:  
It will not completely delete the data in the built-in hard disk; your personal data could leak out. To  
prevent the data from leaking out, execute complete deletion of HDD (see p. 107).  
“Formatting” or “deletion” using the functions of DVD video camera/recorder or PC will change only  
the file control information: It will not completely delete the data on disc or memory card.  
When transferring or discarding a disc or memory card, it is recommended that you physically  
destroy it or use deletion exclusive software (generally available) to completely delete the data on  
it. It is user’s responsibility to control the data on disc and memory card.  
Hitachi will not accept any responsibility for leaking of personal data.  
Read This First  
To guide you, we have included following five chapters.  
The section on “Setups” explains how to set  
up the DVD video camera/recorder, battery,  
and set the date/time.  
The section on “Basic Techniques” explains the  
basic operation of this DVD video camera/  
recorder – recording of movies, still images,  
external input and playback of recorded images.  
A quick index for the information you use  
most often.  
A detailed table of contents directing you to  
specific information quickly (see pages 14 – 16).  
Get to know your DVD video camera/recorder by  
using this manual, and get to know Hitachi. We  
appreciate your business.  
The section on “Disc Navigation” explains  
editing with Disc Navigation: Refer to this  
section when dubbing from HDD to disc,  
finalizing a DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW and  
initializing a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/+RW.  
Quick Index  
Available Discs ................................................ 26  
Recording Movie ............................................. 43  
Playing Back.................................................... 73  
Functions Available with Disc Navigation ........ 80  
Dubbing on DVD.............................................. 83  
Connecting to a TV........................................ 112  
Connecting to PC .......................................... 118  
The section on “Connecting to PC” explains  
the contents of provided CD-ROM and how to  
install the software included.  
“Subsidiary Information” includes an  
introduction to products sold separately, and  
troubleshooting.  
We want this manual to be as helpful as  
possible, so it includes two easy ways to find the  
information you need:  
With this DVD video camera/recorder you can view the picture being recorded or the playback  
picture whether on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. Opening or closing the LCD monitor  
switches the picture to appear on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.  
It is possible to switch the language in the on-screen display of this DVD video camera/recorder  
(see page 36).  
11  
About This Manual  
Displays in this manual  
Understand that the displays are different from those you will actually see in the viewfinder or on  
the LCD screen.  
Notation of cancel button  
Press the STOP/EXIT button to stop your operation midway, or return the menu screen to the  
preceding one. The expression “press the C button” will be used in this text.  
HDD  
, 1, <, >, 2, / and 3 marks beside headings  
Some functions of this DVD video camera/recorder are unavailable with HDD/disc/card used. Refer  
to the marks at right above each function to identify whether the HDD/disc/card is compatible with  
the function. Refer to these marks and identify the functions and operation to match the HDD/disc  
card you use.  
Illustrations in this manual  
Although the external appearances of DZ-HS303A / DZ-HS300A are different, the method of  
operating these models is identical.  
The illustrations of DZ-HS303A are used for the explanation in this text.  
12  
Introduction  
Recording is possible on both HDD and DVD: In FINE mode, recording for  
up to 3 hours is possible on HDD; up to 30 minutes on DVD (p. 43, 156).  
Dubbing to an 8 cm DVD can be performed on this DVD video camera/recorder  
using only one button: Simple dubbing without a DVD recorder or PC (p. 83)  
.
You can capture photos from videos (p. 75).  
You can record an image displayed during playback of video as a photo on a card.  
You can start recording immediately after stopping playback (p. 43, 74).  
Unlike tape devices, you do not need to search for the recording start position or locate the  
beginning of blank portion.  
You can stop playback and immediately start recording: New recording will not overwrite any  
previously recorded data.  
You can immediately play back desired recorded scenes (p. 73).  
You do not need to rewind, unlike recorders using tape.  
You can select any scene you want and immediately play it back (using Disc Navigation function).  
Use Disc Navigation to create your original movie (p. 98).  
You can delete unnecessary scenes, move any scenes, etc., and create your original movie work (Play List).  
To edit the scenes recorded on the HDD, use the dubbing function to easily create a DVD from the  
edited original movie. If you edit the scenes recorded on a disc, you can play back the edited original  
movie and easily dub it on another DVD recorder or VCR.  
Create original DVDs on PC (p. 118).  
You can create an original DVD, using the provided software CD-ROM.  
The created DVD disc can be played back on DVD player/recorder, DVD-ROM drive, etc.  
13  
Table of Contents  
Important Information.........................................2 Turning DVD Video Camera/Recorder  
On and Off.....................................................33  
Viewing Images ...............................................34  
For Your Safety.................................................. 2  
Precautions........................................................ 2  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS........... 4  
Cautions on HDD............................................... 5  
Cautions When Using........................................ 5  
Cautions When Storing...................................... 9  
Suggestions and Restrictions ............................ 9  
VIEWING IMAGE ON LCD MONITOR  
SCREEN...........................................................34  
VIEWING SUBJECT THROUGH  
VIEWFINDER ...................................................34  
Setting Date and Time.....................................35  
CHANGING DISPLAY FORMAT OF DATE  
AND TIME.........................................................35  
Initial Settings ..................................................36  
CLEANING .......................................................... 10  
HANDLING DISCS.............................................. 10  
DISC CLEANING................................................. 11  
NOTE WHEN TRANSFERRING OR  
DISCARDING DISCS AND SD MEMORY  
CARDS ............................................................. 11  
SWITCHING OPERATING SOUND  
ON OR OFF (BEEP).........................................36  
TURNING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER  
OFF AUTOMATICALLY (POWER SAVE) ........36  
CHANGING DISPLAY LANGUAGE  
(LANGUAGE) ...................................................36  
RESETTING MENU SETTINGS TO DEFAULTS  
(RESET) ...........................................................37  
TURNING RECORD LED ON OR OFF  
(RECORD LED)................................................37  
CHANGING SETTING OF  
Read This First ................................................ 11  
About This Manual........................................... 12  
Introduction...................................................... 13  
Table of Contents ............................................ 14  
Checking Provided Accessories ...................... 17  
Names of Parts................................................ 18  
DEMONSTRATION ..........................................37  
LCD/EVF Setup ...............................................38  
Setups  
ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS OF LCD SCREEN  
(LCD BRIGHTNESS) AND VIEWFINDER  
(EVF BRIGHTNESS) ........................................38  
ADJUSTING COLOR DENSITY  
(COLOR LEVEL) ..............................................39  
Demonstration Function...................................22  
Setting Up the DVD Video Camera/  
Recorder ....................................................... 22  
HOLDING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/  
ALWAYS DISPLAYING IMAGE IN  
VIEWFINDER ...................................................39  
RECORDER ..................................................... 22  
ATTACHING SHOULDER STRAP...................... 22  
ATTACHING LENS CAP..................................... 23  
INSERTING BATTERY INTO REMOTE  
Inserting and Removing Disc...........................40  
Inserting and Removing Card..........................42  
CONTROL ........................................................ 23  
REMOVING BATTERY FROM REMOTE  
CONTROL ........................................................ 24  
HDD/DVD/Cards.............................................. 25  
Basic Techniques  
Recording Movie..............................................43  
Recording Stills................................................44  
Swift Restart of Recording  
HDD, DISCS........................................................ 26  
INFORMATION ON DVD-R................................. 26  
NOTES ON FINALIZATION ................................ 26  
EXAMPLES OF DISCS THAT CANNOT BE  
USED ON THIS DVD VIDEO CAMERA/  
RECORDER ..................................................... 27  
AVAILABLE CARDS............................................ 27  
CAUTIONS FOR DISC AND CARD.........................27  
(SLEEP/RESTART button)............................45  
On-Screen Information ....................................46  
INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING  
RECORDING....................................................46  
Checking Flow of Menu ...................................51  
Zooming...........................................................53  
Preparations for Power Supply........................ 28  
MACRO RECORDING ........................................53  
RECORDING SUBJECTS FOR STRONGER  
WIDE-ANGLE OR TELEPHOTO EFFECT.......54  
USING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER WITH  
AC ADAPTER/CHARGER................................ 28  
Setting Up the Battery...................................... 29  
Manually Focusing Subject..............................55  
FOCUSING DURING RECORDING....................55  
Adjusting Brightness of Image to be recorded  
(Exposure).....................................................57  
Compensating for Backlight.............................57  
Using Full Auto Function..................................58  
Built-in Video Flash (for DZ-HS303A only) ......59  
CHARGING BATTERY........................................ 29  
ATTACHING BATTERY TO DVD VIDEO  
CAMERA/RECORDER..................................... 30  
REMOVING BATTERY ....................................... 30  
BATTERY REMAINING LEVEL INDICATOR...... 32  
EFFICIENT USE OF BATTERY.......................... 32  
14  
SELECTING SCENES RECORDED ON HDD  
AND DUBBING THEM (SCENE SELECT  
DUBBING) ........................................................84  
Setting Up Camera Functions..........................60  
SELECTING SHOOTING MODE TO  
MATCH THE SUBJECT  
(SWITCHING PROGRAM AE MODE).............. 60  
Scene .............................................................. 85  
RECORDING DARK SUBJECTS USING LCD  
MONITOR LIGHT ............................................. 61  
ADJUSTING COLOR (WHITE BALANCE).......... 61  
USING THE ELECTRONIC IMAGE  
DELETING SCENES (EDIT – DELETE) .............85  
DIVIDING MOVIES (EDIT – DIVIDE) ..................86  
COMBINING MULTIPLE SCENES  
(EDIT – COMBINE)...........................................87  
STABILIZER (EIS)............................................ 63  
ARRANGING ORDER OF SCENES  
RECORDING SUBJECT USING LARGE  
(EDIT – MOVE).................................................87  
MAGNIFICATION (DIGITAL ZOOM)................ 63  
DIRECTING SCENES EFFECTIVELY  
REDUCING WIND NOISE DURING  
(EFFECT – FADE)............................................88  
RECORDING (MIC.FILTER) ............................ 63  
PLAYING BACK BY SKIPPING SCENES  
(EFFECT – SKIP) .............................................89  
CHANGING IMAGES FOR THUMBNAILS  
(EFFECT – THUMBNAIL).................................90  
COPYING STILLS ON DVD-RAM TO CARD  
(COPY) .............................................................91  
LOCKING SCENES ON CARD (LOCK) ..............92  
SELECTING SCENES USING MENU SCREEN  
(SELECT)..........................................................93  
DISPLAYING INFORMATION USING MENU  
SCREEN (DETAIL)...........................................94  
Setting Up Record Functions ...........................64  
SWITCHING MOVIE QUALITY  
(VIDEO MODE) ................................................ 64  
SETTING TO WIDE TV SCREEN MODE  
(16:9 MODE)..................................................... 65  
SWITCHING QUALITY OF STILL IMAGE  
(QUALITY)........................................................ 67  
RECEIVING IMAGE FROM ANOTHER DEVICE  
(INPUT SOURCE) ............................................ 67  
SWITCHING EXTERNAL INPUT RECORDING  
METHOD (PHOTO INPUT) ..............................68  
SELF-TIMER ....................................................... 68  
SETTING ON-SCREEN DISPLAY OUTPUT ON  
OR OFF (OSD OUTPUT) ................................. 69  
DROP DETECTION (HDD PROTECTION).........69  
Program........................................................... 95  
WHAT IS “PROGRAM”?......................................95  
SWITCHING TO THUMBNAIL DISPLAY OF  
SPECIFIC DATE (SELECT) .............................95  
PLAYING BACK PROGRAM (PLAY) ..................96  
CHANGING TITLE OF PROGRAM (TITLE)........96  
Using External Microphone..............................70  
Play List........................................................... 98  
Disc Navigation  
Using Disc Navigation......................................71  
WHAT IS “PLAY LIST”?.......................................98  
CREATING NEW PLAY LIST (CREATE) ............98  
STARTING OR TERMINATING DISC  
NAVIGATION.................................................... 71  
SWITCHING TO DISPLAY OF EACH PLAY LIST  
(SELECT)..........................................................99  
PLAYING BACK FROM DISC NAVIGATION  
SCREEN........................................................... 73  
ADJUSTING VOLUME DURING PLAYBACK..... 73  
PLAYING BACK LATEST RECORDED  
SCENE ............................................................. 74  
DELETING LAST RECORDED SCENE.............. 74  
CAPTURING PHOTO.......................................... 75  
SEARCH PLAYBACK OF MOVIE ....................... 75  
FRAME ADVANCE/FRAME BACK/SLOW  
PLAYBACK OF MOVIE .................................... 75  
SKIP PLAYBACK OF MOVIE..............................76  
PLAYING BACK STILLS ..................................... 76  
JUMPING TO SPECIFIED POINT (GO TO)........ 77  
INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING  
PLAYING BACK A PLAY LIST (PLAY)................99  
ADDING SCENES TO PLAY LIST  
(EDITING PLAY LIST) ....................................100  
DELETING SCENES FROM PLAY LIST  
(EDITING PLAY LIST) ....................................101  
ADDING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR  
EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST).....................101  
DELETING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR  
EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST).....................102  
SELECTING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR  
EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST).....................102  
ARRANGING ORDER OF SCENES (MOVE) ...103  
CHANGING TITLE OF PLAY LIST (TITLE).......104  
DELETING PLAY LIST (DELETE).....................104  
Go To ............................................................ 105  
PLAYBACK....................................................... 78  
SELECTING MULTIPLE SCENES...................... 79  
SELECTING CONSECUTIVE SCENES  
MOVING TO BEGINNING (END) OF HDD/  
DVD/CARD .....................................................105  
TOGETHER...................................................... 79  
FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE WITH DISC  
NAVIGATION.................................................... 80  
UNDERSTANDING FLOW OF  
HDD/DVD/Card Management ....................... 105  
INITIALIZING HDD/DVD/CARD ........................105  
PROTECTION ...................................................106  
VERIFYING REMAINING FREE SPACE ON  
DISC OR CARD (CAPACITY) ........................106  
UPDATING CONTROL INFORMATION OF  
HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-MODE)  
DISC NAVIGATION MENU ..............................81  
Dubbing on DVD ..............................................83  
DUBBING ALL SCENES RECORDED ON HDD  
(DUBBING ALL)................................................ 83  
(UPDATE CONTROL INFO.)..........................107  
DELETING DATA ON HDD  
(FULL FORMAT).............................................107  
15  
TOC  
FINALIZING DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW  
(FINALIZE DVD)............................................. 108  
ADDITIONALLY RECORDING ON FINALIZED  
DVD-RW (VF-MODE)/+RW  
(UNFINALIZE DVD)........................................ 109  
Cautions when connecting DVD video  
camera/recorder to PC................................137  
Subsidiary Information  
Introduction to Optional Accessories .............138  
Others............................................................ 110  
CAMERA ACCESSORIES ................................138  
POWER SUPPLY..............................................138  
Trouble Messages .........................................139  
DISPLAYING MOVIES OR STILLS  
INDEPENDENTLY (CATEGORY).................. 110  
PLAYING BACK SCENES REPEATEDLY  
(REPEAT PLAY)............................................. 110  
Troubleshooting.............................................146  
System Reset ................................................153  
Major Specifications.......................................154  
PLAYING BACK WIDE-MODE IMAGES ON  
4:3 DISPLAY TV (TV TYPE)........................... 111  
SLIDE SHOW (CONTINUOUS PLAYBACK  
OF STILLS)..................................................... 111  
STORAGE CAPACITY OF HDD/DVD/CARD....156  
RECORDABLE STILLS (PHOTOS) ON  
CARD..............................................................157  
Viewing on TV Screen ...................................112  
CONNECTING TO A TV ................................... 112  
VIEWING ON TV SCREEN............................... 113  
Playback on DVD Recorder/Player................114  
To Order in the United States........................158  
To Order in the Canada.................................158  
Index..............................................................159  
Be sure to read the following before opening  
the package of CD-ROM.............................161  
PLAYING BACK DVD-RAM/DVD-RW  
(VR-MODE) .................................................... 114  
PLAYING BACK DVD-RW (VF-MODE)/  
DVD-R/+RW ................................................... 114  
Recording (Dubbing) Images......................... 115  
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES FROM  
OTHER VIDEO DEVICE  
(for DZ-HS303A only) ..................................... 115  
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES ON  
OTHER VIDEO DEVICES .............................. 117  
Connecting to PC  
Software Provided ......................................... 118  
Requirements of available PC ....................... 119  
Installing Software ......................................... 120  
Connecting to PC via PC Connection  
Cable........................................................... 123  
USING DISC IN DVD DRIVE BUILT  
INTO PC ......................................................... 125  
BEFORE TERMINATING PC CONNECTION  
(UNPLUGGING PC CONNECTION CABLE)/  
CHANGING OVER POWER SWITCH ........... 126  
Using Software .............................................. 127  
[When using Windows]  
USING IMAGEMIXER 3 .................................... 127  
VIEWING IMAGES RECORDED ON  
HDD/DISC USING PC.................................... 127  
CREATING DVD-VIDEO USING IMAGES  
RECORDED ON HDD/DISC .......................... 129  
[When using Macintosh]  
USING PIXE VRF BROWSER EX AND  
IMAGEMIXER VCD/DVD2.............................. 132  
IMPORTING IMAGES RECORDED ON DVD-  
RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R INTO PC TO CREATE  
A DVD-VIDEO (DVD-RW/DVD-R).................. 132  
Viewing Images recorded on Disc  
using PC......................................................135  
Uninstalling Software.....................................136  
Please contact the following for inquiries on  
provided CD-ROM....................................... 136  
16  
Checking Provided Accessories  
Make sure that you have all the following accessories in package:  
Battery (model DZ-BP14S):  
For DZ-HS303A only.  
Battery (model DZ-BP07PW):  
For DZ-HS300A only. Portable power  
AC adapter/charger  
(model DZ-ACS3):  
Portable power supply for this DVD video  
camera/recorder. Charge it before use.  
supply for this DVD video camera/recorder. Used to power the DVD video camera/  
Charge it before use.  
recorder from AC outlet, or charge battery.  
DC power cord:  
Power cable:  
Infrared remote control  
When powering the DVD video camera/  
recorder from household AC outlet, use  
this cord to connect the DVD video  
camera/recorder and AC adapter/charger.  
Connect between household AC outlet and (model DZ-RM4W):  
AC adapter/charger.  
For DZ-HS303A only.  
Use to control the DVD video camera/  
recorder from a distance.  
Lithium battery (model CR2032):  
For DZ-HS303A only.  
AV/S input/output cable:  
For DZ-HS303A only.  
AV/S output cable:  
For DZ-HS300A only.  
To power the remote control.  
Used when viewing the picture played back Used when viewing the picture played back  
on the DVD video camera/recorder on TV  
screen, or input or output video from/to  
another video device.  
on the DVD video camera/recorder on TV  
screen, or output video to another video  
device.  
WARNING: Keep  
this battery away  
from children. If  
swallowed, consult  
a physician  
immediately for  
emergency  
treatment.  
Shoulder strap:  
Attach to the DVD video camera/recorder  
to hang it from shoulder.  
Lens cap and lens cap string:  
Attach the lens cap when not recording, to Use this CD-ROM when connecting the  
protect the lens.  
Software CD-ROM:  
DVD video camera/recorder to PC.  
PC connection cable:  
Use this cable when connecting the DVD  
video camera/recorder to PC.  
Disc cleaning cloth:  
Always use this to clean discs.  
17  
Names of Parts  
9
7
8
10  
1
2
3
4
5
6
11  
12 13  
14  
Lens hood (p. 54)  
Always remove this lens hood when using  
the optional tele-conversion or wide-  
conversion lens.  
(Inside the cover)  
1
2
Flash (for DZ-HS303A only) (p. 59)  
Light receiving sensor  
(for DZ-HS303A only)  
8
9
This sensor controls the amount of light to be  
emitted from the built-in flash. Take care not  
to block with hand, etc. during recording.  
Lens cap string attachment hole (p. 23)  
Stereo microphone  
Take care that the microphone is not blocked  
by a hand, etc., during recording.  
Recording indicator (p. 37, 43, 68)  
The red indicator will light during recording.  
Infrared receiver  
(for DZ-HS303A only) (p. 24)  
When the remote control is used to operate  
the DVD video camera/recorder, this  
receiver will receive the infrared signal.  
Optical 10× zoom lens  
Zoom lever (p. 53, 55, 73)  
To adjust the zoom or volume.  
10 Accessory shoe (for DZ-HS303A only)  
3
4
(p. 59)  
The optional video flash can be attached  
here. (See the instruction manual of device to  
be attached for details.)  
5
6
11 PC connection terminal (TO PC) (p. 123)  
12 AV inout/output jack (p. 112, 115)  
13 External microphone jack (for DZ-HS303A  
only) (p. 70)  
14 Wide-screen color liquid crystal display  
(inside) (p. 34)  
7
Although the external appearances of DZ-  
HS303A and DZ-HS300A are different, the  
method of operating these models is identical.  
DZ-HS303A illustrations are used in this  
manual.  
(for DZ-HS303A only)  
Optical 25× zoom lens  
(for DZ-HS300A only)  
(p. 53)  
18  
15  
16  
17  
18 19 20  
21  
22 23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
15 Viewfinder (p. 34)  
16 Diopter control (p. 34)  
22 BATTERY EJECT button (p. 30)  
Press this button when removing the battery.  
23 Battery attachment platform (p. 30)  
24 Record button (REC) (p. 43)  
To adjust the focus of image appearing in the  
viewfinder. (Pull out the viewfinder.)  
17 SLEEP/RESTART button (p. 45)  
To switch the sleep/restart status between  
ON and OFF.  
25 LOCK switch (p. 43)  
It is recommended that you set the LOCK  
switch to L (to the upper position) to prevent  
the power switch in the “HDD” position  
from accidentally moving to “DVD”.  
18 ACCESS/PC indicator (p. 8, 43)  
Will blink or light when the HDD/DVD is  
accessed (write or read), or the DVD video  
camera/recorder is connected to a PC.  
26 Power switch (p. 33)  
27 Hand strap (p. 22)  
19 PHOTO/SELECT button (p. 44, 79, 93)  
20 DISC EJECT button (p. 40)  
Press down and release this button to open  
the cover of DVD insertion block.  
21 DVD insertion block (p. 40)  
19  
28  
29  
30  
31 32 33 34  
35  
36  
37  
38 39 40 41  
42  
43  
44  
28 FULL AUTO button (p. 58)  
37 DISPLAY (Screen display) button (p. 46, 78)  
Press this button to display the details of  
image being played back or camera setting  
status, or switch the display off.  
To switch the DVD video camera /recorder  
to full automatic.  
29 FOCUS button (p. 55)  
To switch between manual focus and auto-  
focus.  
38 CARD ACCESS indicator (p. 8, 44)  
39 QUICK MENU button (p. 51)  
To display only the functions that you  
frequently use (simple menus).  
40 FINALIZE button (p. 108)  
Press this button to finalize the recorded  
DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW.  
30 MENU button (p. 35, 51, 86)  
Press this button to display the menu for  
setting camera functions and Disc  
Navigation.  
31 DISC NAVIGATION button (p. 71)  
41 Card insertion block (p. 42)  
32 DUBBING button (p. 83)  
42 BLC (backlight compensation) button (p. 57)  
Press this button when subject is being  
lighted from rear.  
33 STOP/EXIT button (p. 12, 51, 74)  
To end playback or cancel setting of menu.  
43 f / e / d / c / A buttons  
(p. 35, 51, 55, 57, 74, 75, 76)  
34 EXPOSURE button (p. 57)  
Press this button to adjust the exposure.  
Use these buttons to select a scene or menu item,  
35 Speaker (p. 73)  
and then press the center (A) to play back the  
36 RESET button (p. 153)  
scene, or designate an option from the menu.  
These buttons are also used to adjust the  
exposure or focus.  
To reset all settings to defaults (status when  
the DVD video camera/recorder was  
shipped from the factory).  
44 Tripod threaded hole  
Used to attach the DVD video camera/  
recorder to a tripod.  
20  
45  
46  
REC  
PHOTO  
DISPLAY  
ZOOM  
52  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
MENU  
47  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
SELECT  
48  
49  
50  
DELETE  
59  
60  
DISC  
NAVIGATION  
51  
45 PHOTO button (p. 44)  
53 ZOOM T button (p. 53)  
46 REC button (p. 43)  
54 DIGITAL ZOOM button (p. 53)  
55 ZOOM W button (p. 53)  
47 MENU button (p. 35, 51, 86)  
48 SELECT button (p. 79, 93)  
49 Reverse search button (p. 75)  
50 DELETE button (p. 85)  
56 Reverse skip button (p. 76)  
57 Forward search button (p. 75)  
58 Play/pause button (p. 74)  
59 Stop button (p. 12, 51, 74)  
60 Forward skip button (p. 76)  
51 DISC NAVIGATION button (p. 71)  
52 DISPLAY button (p. 46, 78)  
* The buttons on remote control will function the same as those on DVD video camera/recorder.  
21  
Setups  
This section explains preparations for recording – setting up the DVD video camera/recorder  
and battery.  
Demonstration Function  
This DVD video camera/recorder is equipped with a demonstration function.  
The default at purchase time is “Auto”, which will automatically start the demonstration approx. ten  
minutes after the DVD video camera/recorder, connected to the AC adapter/charger, is turned on and  
left unoperated.  
Refer to “CHANGING SETTING OF DEMONSTRATION” on page 37 if you  
wish to view the demonstration immediately or change the setting to “Off”.  
Setting Up the DVD Video Camera/Recorder  
HOLDING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER  
Insert your right hand from the bottom of DVD video camera/recorder up to the base of your thumb.  
Put your hand in a position where you can easily operate the REC button and the Zoom lever.  
Adjust the length of hand strap so that the DVD video camera/recorder is stable when you press the  
REC button with your thumb.  
ATTACHING SHOULDER STRAP  
Be sure to pass through the 2 slots.  
Pass the shoulder strap through  
the shoulder strap attachments.  
22  
ATTACHING LENS CAP  
1
2
Attach the shorter end of lens cap string to  
the lens cap.  
Shorter end  
Attach the longer end of lens cap string to the  
attachment hole of DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
Longer end  
3
Push the both sides of cap inward and attach  
it over the lens.  
Push and fit  
Note:  
Always keep the lens cap on when not using the DVD  
video camera/recorder, to protect the lens.  
When recording, attach the lens cap to the hand strap  
by hooking the tab inside the cap onto strap for  
comfortable shooting.  
INSERTING BATTERY INTO REMOTE CONTROL  
Insert the provided lithium battery into remote control.  
1
2
While inserting a fine rod into the hole  
marked PUSH, pull the battery holder out  
forward.  
3
Slide the cover to close it.  
Note:  
The life of lithium battery is approximately one year. If  
the battery is discharged, no operation is possible  
with remote control: Replace the battery.  
Insert the lithium battery with the positive R  
terminal facing down.  
The remote control (DZ-RM4W) and lithium battery  
(CR2032) are supplied only with the DZ-HS303A.  
Battery holder  
23  
REMOVING BATTERY FROM REMOTE CONTROL  
1
While pushing the battery holder, slide the  
battery out.  
Warning:  
KEEP THE BATTERY AWAY FROM CHILDREN AND  
PETS.  
Note:  
Replace the battery with a Hitachi Maxell, Sony,  
Panasonic, Sanyo, Toshiba CR2032, or Duracell  
DL2032. Use of another battery may present a risk of  
fire or explosion.  
Dispose of battery safely in accordance with local  
laws. Do not dispose of in fire.  
IF SWALLOWED, CONSULT A PHYSICIAN  
IMMEDIATELY FOR EMERGENCY TREATMENT.  
BATTERY MAY EXPLODE IF NOT HANDLED  
PROPERLY. DO NOT RECHARGE, DISASSEMBLE  
OR DISPOSE OF IN FIRE.  
Do not short circuit the battery.  
Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers.  
Keep the battery in a dark, cool, dry place.  
Using remote Control  
Point the remote control to the infrared receiver on the DVD video camera/recorder. The remote  
controllable distance is up to 16 feet (5 m).  
Note:  
When using the remote control, make sure that the  
infrared receiver on DVD video camera/recorder is not  
exposed to direct sunlight or any intense light. If the  
infrared receiver is subject to light stronger than the  
infrared light from remote control, the DVD video  
camera/recorder cannot be operated by remote  
control.  
The DVD video camera/recorder uses the “VCR2”  
remote control code of Hitachi VCRs. If you use a  
Hitachi VCR, etc. with remote control code set to  
“VCR2”, a VCR placed near the DVD video camera/  
recorder will also be operated by the remote control:  
To prevent this, change the remote control code of the  
VCR.  
If there is an obstacle between the remote control and  
infrared receiver on DVD video camera/recorder,  
remote control may not be possible.  
The remote control (DZ-RM4W) and lithium battery  
(CR2032) are supplied only with the DZ-HS303A.  
24  
HDD/DVD/Cards  
The following table lists the storage media (discs and cards) that can be used on this DVD video  
camera/recorder and the functions which are available with them:  
Media  
DVD-RW DVD-RW  
SD  
memory  
card  
Function  
DVD-  
RAM  
HDD  
(VR  
(VF  
mode)  
DVD-R  
+RW  
mode)  
To record video (p. 43)  
To record photo (p. 44)  
To delete image just  
recorded (p. 74)  
To select image and delete it  
(p. 85)  
To edit image (p. 86 – 87)  
To play on other DVD players  
and DVD recorders (p. 108)  
*1  
*1*2  
*2  
*2  
*1*2  
*3  
To use new disc or new card  
without formatting  
*4  
*4  
To initialize and reuse  
(p. 105)  
To additionally record on  
finalized disc (p. 109)  
*5  
*5  
To edit copied video on PC  
(p. 118)  
*6  
*6  
*6*7  
*6*7  
*6*7  
*6*7*8  
To playback video on PC  
(p. 118)  
*6  
*6  
*6*7  
*6*7  
*6*7  
*6*7*8  
: Functions available; —: Not available  
*1: Playable on devices that conform to either 8 cm DVD-RAM, 8 cm DVD-RW (VR mode) or 8cm +RW.  
*2: Must be finalized. Cannot be played on some DVD players or DVD recorders.  
*3: Some DVD devices conform to SD memory card.  
*4: When media that are sold “formatted” are used. If the initialization format differs, the media can be initialized on  
this DVD video camera/recorder and then used.  
*5: To additionally record, the finalized disc must be unfinalized.  
*6: The provided software is used.  
*7: Finalize the disc when editing/playing back on PC.  
*8: The software for Macintosh provided with this DVD video camera/recorder is not compatible with a +RW.  
25  
HDD, DISCS  
HDD, and usable discs and marks (logos)  
Function  
Allows extensive recording (approx. 3 hours in FINE  
mode).  
HDD  
Allows you to delete unnecessary scenes or edit  
scenes.  
Allows you to delete unnecessary scenes or edit  
scenes.  
DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1 (8 cm)  
Allows you to choose the VR mode for deleting  
unnecessary scenes or editing scenes, or the VF  
DVD-RW  
mode in which deletion or editing is not possible, but  
[Ver1.1 (8 cm) 2x speed (2x/1x)]  
*1  
high compatibility with DVD players is provided  
*1  
.
Provides high compatibility with DVD players . No  
deletion or editing is possible.  
DVD-R  
[for General Ver. 2.0 (8 cm)]  
Provides high compatibility with DVD players but does  
*2  
not need to be finalized . Scenes can be deleted  
+RW Ver. 1.2 (8 cm)  
immediately after being recorded.  
*1: Playback on all DVD players is not guaranteed. The disc must be finalized before being played back on a DVD  
player.  
*2: Playback on all DVD players is not guaranteed.  
Note:  
This DVD video camera/recorder can use only the 8-cm bare discs not packed in a square cartridge, square caddy  
case or round DVD holder. The discs in a square cartridge, square caddy case or round DVD holder can be used if  
they are removed from the package, but take great care not to dirty or scratch the bare disc.  
It is recommended that you use Hitachi Maxell HG type single-sided discs, since their compatibility with this DVD  
video camera/recorder has been confirmed. When using an HG type double-sided disc, take great care with handling  
it. Using a disc other than these discs may not allow the DVD video camera/recorder to deliver optimum performance.  
INFORMATION ON DVD-R  
For optimum recording on DVD-R, this DVD video camera/recorder writes control data to the disc  
in order to automatically make adjustments when it is inserted and ejected accompanying recording.  
If the disc has no area to be written for adjustment, recording may not be possible. To prevent this,  
do not insert or eject a DVD-R accompanying recording more than 100 times.  
This DVD video camera/recorder cannot record a DVD-R in the VR mode.  
NOTES ON FINALIZATION  
Do not insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R recorded or dubbed on this DVD video camera/recorder but  
not finalized, into a recordable device, such as a DVD recorder: The recorded data may be  
damaged.  
Use only DZ-HS303A/HS300A to record/dub or finalize a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW  
recorded or dubbed on this DVD video camera/recorder but not finalized: Using any other device  
could damage the data recorded on the disc.  
DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW edited and finalized on PC or those finalized on another DVD recorder  
may not be playable on this DVD video camera/recorder, depending on the editing software used  
or recorded status of DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW.  
If you insert a DVD-R recorded on a DVD video camera/recorder other than DZ-HS303A/HS300A and  
not finalized, the Disc Navigation screen will automatically start, and no recording can be done on the disc  
nor can it be finalized.  
Do not insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R that was recorded by a DVD recorder manufactured by a company other  
than Hitachi, and which has not been finalized, in this DVD video camera/recorder: Doing so will make the  
2d6isc unusable.  
EXAMPLES OF DISCS THAT CANNOT BE USED ON THIS DVD VIDEO  
CAMERA/RECORDER  
CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
CD-ROM  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer)  
DVD-RW DL (Dual Layer)  
+R DL (Double Layer)  
+RW DL (Double Layer)  
+R  
DVD-ROM  
DVD-Video  
Discs other than those with diameter of 8 cm  
DVD-R (4.7 GB) for Authoring Ver. 2.0  
AVAILABLE CARDS  
SD memory cards can be used on this DVD video  
camera/recorder (incompatible with 2 GB).  
When using an exclusive adapter, a miniSD  
memory card can be used in the same way as an  
SD memory card. No SDHC card or multimedia  
card can be used.  
CAUTIONS FOR DISC AND CARD  
It is recommended that you create a backup  
file for valuable data on hard disk of PC.  
Do not do the following, or the data on disc or  
card may be damaged or lost:  
Do not remove the disc or card or turn DVD  
video camera/recorder off during reading or  
writing of data  
Do not use DVD video camera/recorder in a  
place subject to static electricity or electrical  
noise  
Do not have printing done at a print lab or  
DPE service  
Do not leave a +RW unused in the DVD  
video camera/recorder for a long time  
Handling card  
Do not use cards other than  
the designated ones.  
Be sure to perform trial  
recording before recording  
vital images.  
Do not touch the card  
terminal or allow it to touch  
Terminal  
metal.  
Do not paste anything other  
Note:  
than exclusive label on label pasting portion.  
Do not subject card to impact, bend or drop it.  
Do not disassemble card or modify it.  
Do not expose card to water.  
Do not use or store card in the following  
places:  
Where the temperature is high, such as in  
vehicle at high temperatures, under burning  
sun or near a heater  
Where humidity is high, or in dusty place  
When the erasure prevention switch is locked,  
no recording, deletion or editing will be  
possible on the card: Only playback will be  
possible.  
This DVD video camera/recorder can play back image  
data recorded on other digital cameras conforming to  
the DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard.  
The range of image data playable on this DVD video  
camera/recorder is that with pixels from 80 horizontal ×  
60 vertical to 4000 horizontal × 3000 vertical.  
DCF is an integrated image file format of digital  
cameras: Image files can be used on all digital  
devices conforming to DCF.  
Image data edited on PC and certain types of image  
data may not be visible on this DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
The image data recorded on another device may not  
be playable on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
Erasure prevention  
switch  
Locked status  
27  
Preparations for Power Supply  
USING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER WITH AC ADAPTER/CHARGER  
It is recommended that you use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/recorder  
from household AC outlet when you perform settings on it, play back or edit images, or use it  
indoors.  
Note:  
Be sure to use the specified AC adapter/charger (DZ-ACS3) to power the DVD video camera/recorder. Using other  
AC adapter/chargers could cause electric shock or result in fire.  
Power cable  
1
2
4
AC adapter/charger  
3
DC power cord  
1
Connect the power cable to AC adapter/  
charger.  
2
3
Plug the power cable into AC outlet.  
Plug one end of DC power cord into the DC  
output jack on AC adapter/charger.  
4
Attach the other end of DC power cord to the  
battery attachment platform on DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
Use the same procedure as that for battery  
when attaching and detaching the DC power  
cord: See page 30.  
28  
Setting Up the Battery  
The DZ-BP14S battery provided with DZ-HS303A or DZ-BP07PW battery provided with DZ-HS300A  
has not been charged at purchase time: Charge it before using the DVD video camera/recorder.  
Note:  
Be sure to use the DZ-BP14S, DZ-BP07PW (unavailable for DZ-HS303A), DZ-BP14SW (optional) or DZ-BP7SW  
(optional, unavailable for DZ-HS303A) battery for the DVD video camera/recorder: Using other batteries could  
cause the DVD video camera/recorder to malfunction, or result in fire.  
Be sure to use the DZ-ACS3 AC adapter/charger to charge the battery: Using other chargers could cause electric  
shock or fire.  
Charge the battery at temperatures of 50 – 86ºF (10 – 30ºC).  
If the CHARGE indicator does not light when the AC adapter/charger is plugged into AC outlet, unplug it from the  
AC outlet, wait a few moments, and then plug it into the AC outlet again. If the CHARGE indicator still does not  
light, the AC adapter/charger may be faulty. Unplug it from the AC outlet and consult your dealer.  
The AC adapter/charger can be used around the world. An AC plug adapter is required in some foreign countries.  
If you need one, purchase it from your local electronics distributor.  
AC 200 – 240V  
AC Plug Adapter (not supplied)  
CHARGING BATTERY  
Use the provided AC adapter/charger to charge the battery.  
1
2
Connect the power cable to AC adapter/  
charger.  
3
Attach the battery to AC adapter/charger.  
Note:  
When charging a battery, unplug the DC power cord  
from the DC output jack on AC adapter/charger.  
Plug the power cable into AC outlet.  
Battery  
Power cable  
CHARGE indicator  
AC adapter/charger  
DC output terminal  
29  
Battery charged status  
You can find out the charged status of battery by checking the CHARGE indicator on AC adapter/  
charger:  
Charge status  
During charge  
CHARGE indicator  
Lit  
Charge complete  
Goes out  
Note:  
See “Troubleshooting” on page 146 when the CHARGE indicator blinks.  
Reference for time required to charge battery (at approx. 77ºF (25ºC))  
DZ-BP14S (provided with DZ-HS303A)/DZ-BP14SW (optional): Approx. 165 minutes  
DZ-BP07PW (provided with DZ-HS300A)/DZ-BP7SW (optional, unavailable for DZ-HS303A):  
Approx. 90 minutes  
The charge time will vary depending on the remaining power level of battery.  
ATTACHING BATTERY TO DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER  
1
Fit the battery to the battery attachment  
platform on this DVD video camera/recorder  
and slide it downward until a click is heard.  
Note:  
Make sure that the battery is in the correct orientation.  
Make sure that the battery is securely attached:  
Incomplete attachment could cause the battery to fall,  
resulting in damage.  
Terminal  
side must be  
down.  
REMOVING BATTERY  
After using the DVD video camera/recorder, remove the battery from it.  
1
While holding down the BATTERY EJECT  
button, slide the battery upward to remove it.  
Note:  
For safety, be sure to turn the DVD video camera/  
recorder off before attaching or removing the battery.  
Be careful not to drop the removed battery.  
If the battery remains attached, minute level current  
will flow even if the DVD video camera/recorder is off,  
and the battery will discharge.  
Set the power switch to OFF before removing the  
battery.  
30  
Continuously recordable time with fully charged battery (with no zoom  
operation, etc.)  
See the following table as a reference for how long the DVD video camera/recorder can  
continuously be used with a fully charged battery:  
With DZ-BP14S (provided with DZ-HS303A)/DZ-BP14SW (optional)  
DZ-HS303A  
DZ-HS300A  
Video mode  
XTRA  
HDD  
DVD  
HDD  
DVD  
When using viewfinder  
When using LCD monitor  
When using viewfinder  
When using LCD monitor  
When using viewfinder  
When using LCD monitor  
approx. 125 min  
approx. 115 min  
approx. 125 min  
approx. 115 min  
approx. 125 min  
approx. 115 min  
approx. 105 min  
approx. 95 min  
approx. 105 min  
approx. 95 min  
approx. 115 min  
approx. 105 min  
approx. 210 min  
approx. 190 min  
approx. 210 min  
approx. 190 min  
approx. 210 min  
approx. 190 min  
approx. 170 min  
approx. 150 min  
approx. 170 min  
approx. 150 min  
approx. 210 min  
approx. 170 min  
FINE  
STD  
With DZ-BP07PW* (provided with DZ-HS300A)/DZ-BP7SW* (optional)  
DZ-HS300A  
Video mode  
HDD  
DVD  
When using viewfinder  
When using LCD monitor  
When using viewfinder  
When using LCD monitor  
When using viewfinder  
When using LCD monitor  
approx. 105 min  
approx. 95 min  
approx. 105 min  
approx. 95 min  
approx. 85 min  
approx. 75 min  
approx. 85 min  
approx. 75 min  
XTRA  
FINE  
STD  
approx. 105 min approx. 100 min  
approx. 95 min approx. 85 min  
* Unavailable for DZ-HS303A.  
The time is only for reference: It will vary depending on recording contents.  
The reference for how long the DVD video camera/recorder can actually be used  
will be approx. 1/2 to 1/3 of the above time:  
The continuously recordable time of DVD video camera/recorder in the above table shows the time  
available when the DVD video camera/recorder is in the recording mode without using any other  
function after recording is started. In actual recording, the battery will discharge 2 – 3 times faster  
than this reference, since the REC button and zoom are being operated, and playback is performed.  
Assume that the actually recordable time with a fully charged battery is between 1/2 and 1/3 of the  
above time, and prepare enough batteries to allow for the time you are planning to record on the  
DVD video camera/recorder.  
The continuously recordable time may be less depending on the conditions when the DVD video  
camera/recorder is used (if recording and recording pause are repeated at short intervals, etc.).  
Note that the battery discharges faster in cold places.  
Note:  
See “Troubleshooting” on page 146 when charging is not possible.  
The charge time will vary depending on the battery remaining level.  
During and after charging, and when the DVD video camera/recorder is being used, the battery will be warm, but  
this does not indicate a fault.  
A battery cannot be charged while the DC power cord is connected to the DC output jack of AC adapter/charger:  
Unplug the DC power cord when charging a battery.  
Charge the battery at ambient temperature 50ºF to 86ºF (10ºC to 30ºC): Charging at temperatures other than this  
range could damage the battery.  
31  
BATTERY REMAINING LEVEL INDICATOR  
When the battery is used to power the DVD video camera/recorder, the battery remaining level  
appears in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen as follows:  
Fully charged  
Nearly empty  
White portion shows remaining level  
(Blinks)  
EFFICIENT USE OF BATTERY  
The battery will slightly discharge even if it is  
detached from the DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
Battery life:  
The battery life varies greatly depending on the  
ambient environment and how often the DVD  
video camera/recorder is used. If the usable  
time of DVD video camera/recorder with a fully  
charged battery is noticeably short, the battery is  
probably dead: Purchase a new one.  
If the battery is left attached to DVD video  
camera/recorder, it will consume a slight  
amount of power. Therefore, it is  
recommended that you charge the battery  
shortly before using the DVD video camera/  
recorder, usually on the day before you plan to  
use it.  
Power save and discharge of battery:  
It is recommended that you turn the DVD video  
camera/recorder off in status other than  
recording, since even during recording pause  
battery power is consumed at the same level as  
during recording.  
If, when you specify Power Save On, the  
recording pause status continues for  
approximately 5 minutes, the DVD video  
camera/recorder will automatically turn off.  
To set or release power save, see “TURNING  
DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER OFF  
AUTOMATICALLY (POWER SAVE)” on  
page 36.  
When not using the DVD video camera/  
recorder for an extended period:  
It is recommended that you fully charge the  
battery once a year, attach it to DVD video  
camera/recorder and use it up; then remove the  
battery and store it in a cool place again.  
32  
Turning DVD Video Camera/Recorder On and  
Off  
While holding down the gray button at the right  
of power switch, set the switch according to  
each recording function:  
Note:  
Once you turn the DVD video camera/recorder on to  
let it recognize the disc, you can immediately record  
or play back by turning the DVD video camera/  
recorder on again. However, if a long time has  
elapsed after the disc was inserted, it will take some  
time for the DVD video camera/recorder to start  
because it must recognize the disc again (see  
Troubleshooting” on page 146).  
Set to “OFF”:  
The DVD video camera/  
recorder will turn off  
Set to “SD”:  
It will take some time for the DVD video camera/  
recorder to display the Disc Navigation screen after  
power is turned on.  
When the DVD video camera/recorder is turned on,  
the self-diagnosis function will work and a message  
may appear. In this case, refer to “Trouble Messages”  
on page 139 and take corrective action.  
To record photos on an SD  
memory card and play  
them back  
Set to “HDD”:  
To record or dub movie on  
HDD and play it back  
When turning the DVD video camera/recorder off or  
changing over the power switch between “HDD” and  
“DVD”, you will not need to hold down the gray button:  
Simply move the power switch.  
Set to “DVD”:  
To record movie on DVD-  
RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R/  
+RW and play it back  
P
Power switch  
33  
Viewing Images  
VIEWING IMAGE ON LCD MONITOR  
VIEWING SUBJECT THROUGH  
VIEWFINDER  
SCREEN  
If you open the LCD monitor, you can monitor  
subject image on the LCD screen.  
1
2
Pull out the viewfinder.  
1
Open the LCD monitor.  
Turn the diopter control knob to adjust the  
focus to suit your eyesight.  
The LCD monitor has a portion where you  
can hook your finger. Hook the finger there to  
open the monitor.  
Note:  
If no image appears in viewfinder, refer to  
Troubleshooting” on page 146.  
If the LCD monitor is opened approximately 90º, the  
viewfinder will be off: Turn the open LCD monitor 180º  
so that it faces the same direction as the lens; the  
image will appear in the viewfinder.  
Focusing will not be correct unless the viewfinder is  
pulled out.  
See “LCD/EVF Setup” (on page 39) if you wish to  
display images in the viewfinder regardless of  
whether you open or close the LCD monitor.  
Range where the LCD monitor can  
be moved  
The LCD monitor can be opened up to  
approximately 90º.  
If the LCD monitor is open 90º, it can be tilted  
with the screen down as much as 90º, and can  
also be tilted with screen up and turned up to  
180° so the screen faces in the same direction as  
the lens.  
Diopter control  
Viewfinder  
If the LCD monitor is turned 180º so the screen  
faces in the same direction as the lens during  
recording, subject image will also appear in the  
viewfinder as a mirror image (left/right  
reversed).  
Tilt the LCD monitor to adjust its vertical angle  
so that you can see the screen easily.  
Note:  
Pull out the viewfinder  
until a click is heard.  
If no image appears on LCD monitor screen, refer to  
Troubleshooting” on page 146.  
If LCD monitor lights white, refer to page 61.  
Be sure to open the LCD monitor approximately 90º  
before changing its vertical angle.  
Do not record for a prolonged time with the LCD  
monitor turned approximately 180º in close contact  
with the DVD video camera/recorder body: Doing this  
could cause the DVD video camera/recorder and LCD  
monitor to become hot.  
180º  
90º  
Hook your finger  
(Bottom)  
34  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Setting Date and Time  
Set the current date and time so that the date and time you make a recording can be recorded  
correctly.  
The following procedure can also be used to correct the date and time you have already set.  
Use f / e / d / c buttons  
to select, and then press A to  
designate.  
1
2
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c buttons to choose “Date Set” on the  
“Date Setup” menu screen.  
Press the f or e button to select the  
number for current date/time, and then  
repeat step 3 to set the current date and time.  
Note:  
To stop date/time setting midway, press the C  
Press the c button.  
Da t e Se  
Da t e Se  
t
u p  
t
1
/
1
/
:
2006  
00A  
button.  
Da t e Mode  
12  
M
The figure for the  
month will be selected.  
[The digit that is  
highlighted first depends on the date display  
format (set up in Date Mode): The digit on the  
left end of the date display will be first  
highlighted.]  
4
5
After setting the current  
date and time, press the  
A button.  
Da t e Se  
t
ENTER  
RETURN  
12/ 1 / 2006 8 : 00AM  
Da t e se t up?  
YES  
NO  
ENTER  
The screen for verifying  
the set date will appear.  
Note:  
If the displayed date and time are correct,  
press the d button to choose “YES”, and  
then press the A button.  
After setting the figure for the month, press the c  
button to select the digit to be set. If you press the  
A button after selecting the figure for the month,  
the screen for verifying the set date will appear  
instead of screen for setting day, year or time.  
The date and time will be set, and the DVD  
video camera/recorder will enter the  
recording pause status.  
3
Press the d or c  
Da t e Se  
Da t e Se  
Da t e Mode  
t
u p  
t
1 2  
/
1
8
/
:
2006  
00AM  
button to select the digit  
you want to set in  
sequence.  
Choosing “NO” will restore the menu screen.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
CHANGING DISPLAY FORMAT OF DATE AND TIME  
You can select one of three date display formats: month/day/year, day/month/year or year/  
month/day. Choose “Date Mode” on the “Date Setup” menu screen in procedure 1, and then set to  
the desired date display mode.  
Note:  
This DVD video camera/recorder incorporates a rechargeable battery to store the date and time in memory. If this  
built-in battery is exhausted, the date and time will be reset. To prevent this, every 6 months, connect the AC  
adapter/charger to DVD video camera/recorder and connect them to AC outlet, or attach a charged battery to the  
DVD video camera/recorder, and leave it for at least 24 hours with the DVD video camera/recorder turned off: The  
built-in battery will recharge.  
35  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Initial Settings  
Press the MENU button, and then use f/e/d/c/A buttons to display the “Initial Setup”  
menu screen. See page 51 for detailed operation procedure. Press the MENU button again to exit  
setting.  
SWITCHING OPERATING SOUND ON OR OFF (BEEP)  
Select “On” or “Off”, and  
then press the A button.  
On: Beep will be heard  
when the power  
Note:  
I
n
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L a n g u a g e  
Demo Mode  
Reset  
i
t
e
i
p
a
l
S e t u p  
On  
Of  
The “Beep” setting will be stored in memory even when  
the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
S
a v e  
f
ENTER  
RETURN  
switch is changed  
over, the REC button is pressed when  
HDD/disc is used, the SLEEP/START or  
EJECT button is pressed, etc.  
Off: No beep is heard.  
TURNING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER OFF AUTOMATICALLY  
(POWER SAVE)  
Select “On” or “Off”, and  
then press the A button.  
On: To engage power  
save. If the DVD  
Note:  
I
n
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L a n g u a g e  
Demo Mode  
Reset  
i
t
e
i
p
a
l
S e t u p  
On  
Of  
To turn the DVD video camera/recorder on again from  
automatic off activated by the power save function,  
set the power switch to “OFF”, and then set it to  
“HDD”, “DVD” or “SD”.  
S
a v e  
f
ENTER  
RETURN  
video camera/  
The Power Save setting will not appear in the on-  
screen information display.  
If the sleep/start standby status continues for 30  
minutes, the DVD video camera/recorder will  
automatically turn off regardless of the Power Save  
setting.  
recorder is left in the recording pause status  
without being operated for 5 minutes, it  
will automatically turn off to prevent the  
battery from discharging needlessly.  
Off: To cancel power save.  
CHANGING DISPLAY LANGUAGE (LANGUAGE)  
You can change the language used to display the menu and information.  
The following shows that English is changed to French.  
1
2
Press A or c button  
with the screen shown  
on the right displayed:  
The “Language” screen  
will appear.  
Note:  
I
n
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L an gu age  
Demo Mode  
Reset  
i
t
e
i
p
a
l
S e t u p  
a v e  
On  
O f  
On  
En g  
Au  
The language setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
S
f
l
o
i
s h  
t
ENTER  
RETURN  
Choose “Français”, and  
then press A button.  
The display will change  
to French.  
L an gu age  
En g  
Español  
ano  
l
i
s h  
F r ança  
i
s
D e u t s c h  
I
t
a
l
i
ENTER  
RETURN  
36  
RESETTING MENU SETTINGS TO DEFAULTS (RESET)  
You can restore menu settings to defaults (initial settings at the factory (p. 153)). (Note, however, that  
the date/time will not be reset.)  
1
Choose “Reset” on the  
“Initial Setup” menu  
screen, and then press  
the A button.  
2
If you are sure that you  
wish to reset, use the  
d button to choose  
“YES”, and then press  
the A button.  
I
n
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L a n g u a g e  
Demo Mode  
Reset  
i
t
e
i
p
a
l
S e t u p  
a v e  
Re s e t  
On  
Off  
On  
English  
S
Re s e t  
?
Auto  
YES  
NO  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
The screen for verifying reset will appear.  
The setting items have now been reset to  
defaults.  
Note:  
To cancel resetting midway, choose “NO” on the screen  
for verification in step 2 or press the C button.  
TURNING RECORD LED ON OR OFF (RECORD LED)  
You can switch off the recording indicator on the front of DVD video camera/recorder even during  
recording.  
Select “On” or “Off”, and  
then press the A button.  
On: The recording  
indicator will light  
red to show that the  
DVD video camera/recorder is recording.  
Off: The recording indicator will not light even  
during recording.  
Note:  
I
n
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L a n g u a g e  
Demo Mode  
Reset  
i
t
e
i
p
a
l
S e t u p  
a v e  
On  
The Record LED setting will not appear in the on-  
screen information display.  
S
Of  
f
The Record LED setting will be stored in memory  
even when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned  
off.  
Specify “Record LED: Off” when recording a subject  
behind a glass or water tank that reflects light: The  
reflected light of the recording indicator will not be  
recorded.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Even if “Record LED: Off” is specified, the recording  
indicator will light while the self-timer is counting  
down.  
CHANGING SETTING OF DEMONSTRATION  
Choose the desired option  
using the screen on the  
right, and then press the  
A button.  
Note:  
I n i  
Beep  
t
i
a l S e t u p  
A u t o  
O f  
S t a r  
If “Auto” is specified, the demonstration will not start if  
a battery is connected.  
Power Save  
Re c o r d LED  
Language  
Demo Mode  
Reset  
f
t
Pressing the C (STOP/EXIT) or DISC NAVIGATION  
button will exit demonstration.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
If “Auto” is specified, the demonstration will not start  
when the power switch on this DVD video camera/  
recorder is set to “DVD” and a DVD is loaded, or when  
the power switch is set to “SD” and a card is loaded.  
The demonstration function will not work when the  
DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC.  
While the demonstration is being given, the recording  
indicator will blink.  
Auto: To start demonstration if the DVD  
video camera/recorder connected to  
AC adapter/charger is inactive for  
approx. 10 minutes or more after it is  
turned on.  
Off:  
To set demonstration to off.  
Start: To start demonstration immediately.  
37  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
LCD/EVF Setup  
ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS OF LCD SCREEN (LCD BRIGHTNESS) AND  
VIEWFINDER (EVF BRIGHTNESS)  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c/A buttons to choose “LCD/EVF  
Adjust” on the “LCD/EVF Setup” menu  
screen, and then choose “LCD Brightness”or  
“EVF Brightness”.  
3
Press the A button to end the setting.  
Note:  
To stop the setting midway, press the MENU button.  
The brightness setting will be stored in memory even  
after the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
The brightness adjustment bar will appear on  
the screen.  
2
Use the d/c buttons  
for adjustment.  
LCD/ EVF Ad j u s t  
LCD Br  
i
gh t n e s s  
EVF Br  
i
gh t n e s s  
Co  
l
o r L ev e  
ADJUST  
l
Press d :  
ENTER  
The screen becomes  
dimmer.  
Press c :  
The screen becomes  
brighter.  
Brightness  
adjustment bar  
38  
ADJUSTING COLOR DENSITY (COLOR LEVEL)  
You can adjust the color density of the LCD monitor screen and viewfinder.  
1
Press the MENU  
3
Press the A button to end the setting.  
Note:  
LCD/ EVF Se t up  
LCD/ EVF Ad u s  
EVF s p l a y  
j
t
button, use the f/  
e/d/c/A  
buttons to choose  
“LCD/EVF Adjust” on  
the “LCD/EVF Setup” menu screen, and then  
choose “Color Level”.  
D
i
Au t  
o
To stop the setting midway, press the MENU button.  
The color setting will be stored in memory even after  
the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
Even if the brightness or density of LCD monitor  
screen or viewfinder is changed, the brightness or  
density of the recorded image itself will not change.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
The color density adjustment bar will appear  
on the screen.  
2
Use the d/c buttons  
for adjustment.  
LCD/ EVF Ad j u s t  
LCD Br  
i
gh t n e s s  
EVF Br  
i
gh t n e s s  
Co  
l
o r L ev e  
ADJUST  
l
Press d :  
ENTER  
For lighter color.  
Press c :  
For denser color.  
Color density  
adjustment bar  
ALWAYS DISPLAYING IMAGE IN VIEWFINDER  
1
Press the MENU  
button, use the f/  
e/d/c/A  
2
Choose “On” and press the A button.  
Auto: If the LCD monitor is open, no image  
will appear in the viewfinder.  
LCD/ EVF Se t up  
LCD/ EVF Ad u s  
EVF s p l a y  
j
t
Au t  
On  
o
D
i
buttons to choose “EVF  
Display” on the “LCD/  
EVF Setup” menu screen.  
On: Images will always appear in the  
viewfinder regardless of whether the  
LCD monitor is open/closed.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Note:  
The setting on EVF Display will be stored in memory  
even after the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
39  
1<>2/  
Inserting and Removing Disc  
1
Set the power switch to “DVD” or “OFF” .  
When removing the disc:  
While pushing down the center portion of  
turntable, pick up the disc, holding its edge,  
to remove it.  
When the power switch is set to “HDD” or  
“SD”, the cover of disc insertion block will  
not open. When “Please insert DVD.” appears  
during dubbing, however, the cover of disc  
insertion block will open even when the  
power switch is set to “HDD” (see p. 83, 84).  
Turntable  
2
3
Press down the DISC EJECT button once and  
release it.  
A few moments after the ACCESS/PC  
indicator blinks, the cover of disc insertion  
block will open.  
Gently open the cover by hand fully until it  
stops.  
Pickup lens  
DISC EJECT  
Note that the recording surface of disc must face  
the inside of DVD video camera/recorder. When  
using a single-sided disc, the recording surface is  
the side without label.  
Never touch the disc recording surface or pickup  
lens. Touching the pickup lens could cause a fault.  
Use the disc cleaning cloth provided to wipe off  
any dirt adhering to the disc recording surface.  
Do not use a dirtied or scratched disc.  
4
When inserting a disc:  
Push the disc against the turntable at the  
center to lock it until a click is heard.  
5
Push the section marked “PUSH CLOSE” on  
the cover of disc insertion block, to close the  
cover.  
Then the DVD video camera/recorder will  
automatically recognize the disc: While the  
ACCESS/PC indicator is lit, do not cut off the  
power supply, and do not subject the DVD  
video camera/recorder to any vibrations or  
impact.  
Push the shaded  
portion.  
40  
Note:  
If the cover of disc insertion block is open, the ACCESS/PC indicator will blink when an image is displayed on the LCD  
monitor screen: In this case, the DVD video camera/recorder will not turn off even if the power switch is set to “OFF”.  
If the cover remains open after a while, the DVD video camera/recorder will automatically turn off.  
Disc cannot be inserted or removed unless a charged battery or AC adapter/charger is connected to the DVD  
video camera/recorder.  
If there is some delay before recording starts, refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 146.  
Do not close the cover if a disc is not properly loaded on the turntable.  
If a single-sided disc is inserted into DVD video camera/recorder with the printed label facing the inside, an error  
message will appear. Remove the disc and reinsert it with its recording side facing the inside. See “Trouble  
Messages” on page 139.  
Do not remove the battery or disconnect the AC adapter/charger during removal of the disc or until power is  
completely turned off: If you do, the disc cover will not open. If this happens, reattach the battery or AC adapter/  
charger, push down the DISC EJECT button once, and then release it.  
Do not insert anything other than the 8 cm DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW into the disc insertion block: Doing  
so could cause malfunctions.  
When inserting or removing the disc, BE SURE NOT to look into the lens in laser pickup: Doing so could damage  
your eyesight.  
Close the cover of disc insertion block gently: Using force could cause a fault.  
• When using double-sided disc  
Recording is possible on both sides of double-sided disc. However, when recording or playback on one side is  
finished, recording or playback will not move automatically to the other side. Remove the disc once from the DVD  
video camera/recorder, turn over the disc and insert it again for continued use.  
The recording surfaces of double-sided disc are likely to become dirtied or scratched: Always make sure that  
there is no dirt or scratch on the recording surface facing the pickup lens, and then use the disc taking great care  
that it is not dirtied or scratched. Use the provided disc cleaning cloth to wipe off any dirt on disc (see page 11).  
When using brand-new DVD-RW/+RW  
When a disc is first loaded in the DVD video camera/recorder, the “Format DVD” screen will  
appear.  
When recording on this DVD video  
camera/recorder:  
Choose “Yes” on the “Format DVD” screen, and  
then press A button.  
When recording data from PC:  
While the “Format DVD” screen is displayed,  
choose “No” and then press A button, or  
press the C button.  
However, if data from PC has not yet been  
recorded, the disc can be made usable on this  
DVD video camera/recorder. When inserting  
the disc into this DVD video camera/recorder,  
the same message will appear: If you wish to use  
it on this DVD video camera/recorder, choose  
“YES”.  
When using DVD-RW, choose the recording  
format (VR or VF mode), and then press the  
A button.  
The disc will be formatted.  
F o r  
m
a t D V D  
F o r  
m
a t D V D  
D V D i s n o t f o r m a t t e d .  
F o r m a t t h e D V D n o w ?  
D V D F o r m a t .  
Se l ec  
t
r
ec o r d  
f
o r  
m
a t .  
YES  
NO  
VR  
M
o de  
VF  
M
o de  
ENTER  
ENTER  
(When using DVD-RW)  
41  
3
Inserting and Removing Card  
1
2
3
4
Open the LCD monitor.  
Turn the DVD video camera/recorder off.  
Open the cover of card insertion block.  
Inserting Card:  
Insert card with its terminal inward until it  
locks.  
Removing Card:  
Push the center of card edge.  
The card will come out so that it can be held  
by fingers.  
5
Close the cover of card insertion block.  
Note:  
Always close the cover of cart insertion block: Placing  
the DVD video camera/recorder on a desk, etc. with  
cover open could damage the cover.  
42  
Basic Techniques  
This section explains about recording of movies and still images, and also basic settings on  
DVD video camera/recorder.  
HDD  
1<>2/  
Recording Movie  
When setting the power switch to “DVD”, insert a recordable DVD-RAM/DVD-  
Before You Begin  
RW/DVD-R/+RW into this DVD video camera/recorder.  
Note:  
Pressing REC  
See “Troubleshooting” on page 146 when recording  
movie is not possible.  
See “Troubleshooting” on page 146 if it takes some  
time before recording is possible.  
See “Troubleshooting” on page 146 if the DVD video  
camera/recorder does not operate.  
once will start  
recording;  
pressing it once  
again will  
temporarily stop  
recording.  
ACCESS/PC  
indicator  
See page 46 for on-screen information display.  
It is recommended that you set the LOCK switch to L  
(the upper position) to prevent the power switch in the  
“HDD” position from accidentally moving to “DVD”  
position.  
When using a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW,  
videos of different qualities (VIDEO Modes) or 16:9  
On and Off cannot be recorded or dubbed on the  
same disc (see page 83).  
While the ACCESS/PC indicator is lit or blinking, do  
not turn the DVD video camera/recorder off, and take  
care not to subject it to any vibration: Doing so could  
cause an error in the recorded data, which could  
make it unplayable (see page 8).  
1
2
Remove the lens cap, and then point the DVD  
video camera/recorder at subject.  
Turn the DVD camera/recorder on.  
Set the power switch to “HDD” or “DVD” to  
turn the DVD video camera/recorder on.  
After the ACCESS/PC indicator goes out,  
perform the subsequent operation:  
The minimum recordable time of movie is  
approximately 3 seconds.  
Hitachi cannot be responsible for video and audio that  
cannot be recorded or edited because of any defect.  
Each time the DVD video camera/recorder enters the  
recording pause status, the counter display will be  
reset to “0:00:00”.  
If, when using a +RW, one-time recording duration is  
short or you frequently switch the video quality,  
recording may not be possible even when the disc  
has remaining space.  
3
4
Check the subject on the screen (viewfinder  
or LCD).  
When using the viewfinder, close the LCD  
monitor before pulling out the viewfinder.  
Press the REC button.  
The “m” mark in the viewfinder or on the  
LCD screen will change to the “n” mark,  
and recording will start.  
During recording, the recording indicator on  
the front of DVD video camera/recorder will  
light.  
Pressing REC again during recording will set  
the DVD video camera/recorder to the  
recording pause status.  
5
When recording is finished, turn the DVD  
video camera/recorder off.  
43  
3
Recording Stills  
5
Press the PHOTO/SELECT button all the way  
(full pressing).  
Note:  
Recording of still images is possible on card.  
The screen will be black, and then the  
recorded still will be displayed. When the  
m” mark appears, you can proceed with  
the next recording; while “CARD ACCESS” is  
being displayed, you cannot proceed with the  
next recording.  
PHOTO/SELECT  
button  
Note:  
If you wish to record without locating a subject at the  
center of screen, first locate the subject at the center  
of screen, press the PHOTO/SELECT button halfway  
down, determine the composition to be recorded, and  
then press the PHOTO/SELECT button all the way  
down.  
If you press the PHOTO/SELECT button all the way  
down at one stroke without pressing it half way,  
recording will be possible, but the focus may be  
incorrect.  
See “Size And Quality Of Photos” on page 157 for  
details of photos on card.  
CARD ACCESS indicator  
See “Troubleshooting” on page 146 if recording  
photos is not possible.  
If focusing is difficult with auto focus, choose manual  
focus, and manually correct the focus before  
recording (see page 55).  
1
2
Remove the lens cap, and then point the DVD  
video camera/recorder at subject.  
Turn the DVD camera/recorder on.  
Set the power switch to “SD”.  
Shake of the DVD video camera/recorder may cause  
blur in recorded image.  
When holding the DVD video camera/recorder for  
recording, grasp it securely with both hands.  
When recording with higher zoom magnification, it is  
recommended that you secure the DVD video  
camera/recorder on a tripod.  
After the CARD ACCESS indicator goes out,  
perform the subsequent operation:  
There may be a difference between the image you  
see on the LCD screen or viewfinder and the  
recorded image.  
3
4
Check the subject on the screen (viewfinder  
or LCD).  
When using the viewfinder, pull it out and  
close the LCD monitor.  
Press the PHOTO/SELECT button half way  
(half pressing).  
The DVD video camera/recorder will  
automatically focus on the subject at the  
center of screen, and the “m” indicator on  
screen will light in purple (the focus will not  
change when manual focus is chosen).  
44  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Swift Restart of Recording (SLEEP/RESTART  
button)  
If you press the SLEEP/RESTART button while in the recording pause status instead of turning the  
DVD video camera/recorder off, the status that recording is possible will be restored in approx. one  
second.  
Setting to the sleep/restart standby  
status:  
Press the SLEEP/RESTART button in the  
recording pause status.  
The SLEEP/RESTART button will light, and the  
DVD video camera/recorder will enter the  
sleep/restart standby status.  
In the following cases, pressing the SLEEP/  
RESTART button will not set the DVD video  
camera/recorder to the sleep/restart standby  
Note:  
If you press the REC or PHOTO/SELECT button while  
in the sleep/restart standby status, the sleep/restart  
status will be released, but recording of a video or  
photo will not start. To record, press the REC or  
PHOTO/SELECT button again.  
After the DVD video camera/recorder is restored from  
the sleep/restart standby status, the zoom position  
will return to 1 to 1.5x. The settings on manual focus,  
exposure and rear lighting will also reset to the initial  
values.  
The DVD video camera/recorder in sleep/restart  
standby status consumes approx. half the power it  
does during ordinary recording, but the recordable  
duration in that status will be longer than standing by  
in the recording pause status.  
If the sleep/restart standby status continues more  
than 30 minutes, the DVD video camera/recorder will  
turn off regardless of the Power Save setting (leaving  
the DVD video camera/recorder in recording pause  
status for 5 minutes will also turn it off: Default).  
Setting the power switch to OFF in the sleep/restart  
standby status will turn the DVD video camera/  
recorder off.  
status:  
No disc is loaded although the power switch is set to  
“DVD”.  
No card is loaded although the power switch is set to  
“SD”.  
An unusable disc or card is loaded.  
The HDD or a loaded DVD or card has no remaining  
free space.  
The Disc Navigation screen is being displayed.  
During playback.  
Restoring from sleep/restart standby  
status:  
Press the SLEEP/RESTART button that is lit:  
The DVD video camera/recorder will return to  
the recording pause status.  
SLEEP/RESTART button  
Pressing the REC or PHOTO/SELECT button  
will also restore the DVD video camera/  
recorder to recording pause from the sleep/  
restart standby status.  
The following operation will release the sleep/  
restart standby status:  
Press down the DISC EJECT button.  
Change over the power switch (“HDD”“DVD”).  
45  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
On-Screen Information  
Various types of information will appear in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen during recording.  
DISPLAY  
INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING RECORDING  
See the next page for details.  
e
j
n
m
2. Program AE  
3. White balance  
4. EIS  
5. Backlight compensation  
6. 16:9 mode  
p
7. Microphone filter  
8. Video flash  
9. Self-timer  
10. External Input  
11. Recording status  
Movie recording time  
1. Recording mode  
12. Zoom  
18. Remaining space  
on HDD/DVD/Card  
19. Remaining  
13. Exposure correction  
battery level  
14.Manual Focus  
FULL AUTO indicator  
(p. 58)  
20. Volume  
Warning message  
Current date/time  
17. HDD  
Protection  
15. HDD,DVD/Card type  
16. Movie recording quality  
The above screen is an example for explanation:  
It is different from the actual display.  
46  
1. Recording mode (p. 43, 44, 68)  
9. Self-timer (only in still recording mode) (p. 68)  
: Movie (HDD/DVD)  
No display : Self-timer OFF  
A
: Self-timer ON  
q
: Still (Card)  
E
(countdown is from 10 seconds)  
F*1  
G*1  
: External input still (field) (Card)  
: External input still (frame) (Card)  
1
10.External Input (p. 67)*  
2. Program AE (only in movie recording mode)  
L IN  
S IN  
: AV input  
: S-VIDEO input  
(p. 60)  
No display : Auto  
11.Recording status  
: Sports  
b
c
d
e
f
: During recording  
n
m
: Portrait  
: During recording pause (lights in  
green)  
: Spotlight  
: Sand & Snow  
: Low Light  
When focus locks during photo  
recording (lights in purple)  
*3  
No display  
3. White balance (p. 61)  
12.Zoom (p. 53)  
No display : Auto  
: Set  
h
i
W
: Outdoor  
: Indoor1  
: Indoor2  
(Digital Zoom: Off)  
X
j
k
4
(Digital Zoom: 40×* )  
2
Y
4. Electronic image stabilizer (EIS)* (p. 63)  
5
(Digital Zoom: 500×* only in movie  
recording mode)  
No display : EIS OFF  
: EIS ON  
n
13.Exposure correction (p. 57)  
5. Backlight compensation (p. 57)  
No display : Auto  
: Manual  
No display : Backlight compensation OFF  
: Backlight compensation ON  
m
14.Manual focus (p. 55)  
6. 16:9 mode (only in movie recording mode)  
No display : Autofocus  
: Manual focus  
(p. 65)  
No display : 16:9 mode OFF  
: 16:9 mode ON  
7. Microphone filter (only in movie recording  
mode) (p. 63)  
No display : Microphone filter OFF  
: Microphone filter ON  
p
*1  
8. Video flash [when Video Flash (sold  
separately) is attached] (only in still recording  
mode) (p. 59)  
No display : Emits light automatically  
: Always emits light  
(
)
: No light emission  
47  
15.HDD, DVD/Card type  
16. Movie recording quality (only in movie  
recording mode) (p. 64)  
: HDD  
XTRA  
FINE  
STD  
: Best quality  
: High quality  
: Standard quality  
: HDD (write-protected)  
: DVD-RAM  
I
: DVD-RAM (write-protected)  
: DVD-RW (VR-mode/VF-mode)  
: Protected DVD-RW (VR-mode)  
J
< / >  
$
Still recording quality (only in still recording  
mode) (p. 67)  
: DVD-RW (VR-mode) finalized on  
this video camera/recorder  
: DVD-RW (VR-mode) finalized on a  
device other than this DVD video  
camera/recorder  
"
FINE  
NORM  
ECO  
: High quality  
: Standard quality  
: Number of recordable stills is  
prioritized  
?
: Finalized DVD-RW (VF-mode) disc  
#
K
17.HDD Protection (p. 69)  
: DVD-R  
: DVD-R already finalized on this  
DVD video camera/recorder  
: DVD-R finalized on a device other  
than this DVD video camera/  
recorder (including a DVD-R  
recorded on a Hitachi DVD video  
camera/recorder marketed before  
DZ-HS303A/HS300A, but not  
finalized)  
!
No display : HDD Protection On  
: HDD Protection Off  
N
*7  
18.Remaining space on disc/card  
REM XX  
MIN  
REM XX  
: Remaining recordable minutes  
during movie recording  
: Number of remaining recordable  
still images during still recording  
*8  
*9  
: +RW  
19.Remaining battery level (p. 32)  
: Finalized +RW  
: SD memory card  
O
P
(full charge)  
w
x
y
z
: Locked SD memory card  
*6  
No display  
(low remaining charge)  
20.Volume (p. 73)  
:
The volume can be adjusted during  
external input and playback.  
*1 Not displayed on DZ-HS300A.  
*2 EIS cannot be used when recording photos on DZ-HS303A.  
*3 When no disc or card is in the DVD video camera/recorder or disc has not yet been initialized, a write-protected  
disc or locked card, or a disc or card with no remaining space, has been inserted. Or if the HDD is protected or  
has no remaining free space.  
*4 “100x” on DZ-HS300A.  
*5 “1200x” on DZ-HS300A.  
*6 No display if no disc or card is loaded, or if a disc or card unusable on this DVD video camera/recorder is  
loaded.  
*7 No remaining time or number will be displayed with a protected disc or locked card, or finalized DVD-RW (VF-  
mode)/DVD-R/+RW.  
*8 In XTRA mode, possible recording time may be longer than the displayed time.  
*9 The displayed number of recordable stills is for reference: This number may not decrease, depending on the  
recording conditions.  
48  
Switching the information display mode  
You can switch the display mode of on-screen information:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
The full and minimum display modes will alternate.  
Full display mode: All types of information will  
appear.  
DISPLAY  
Minimum display mode: The recording mode (see  
1 on page 46) and recording status (see 11 on  
page 46) will appear. If the DVD video camera/  
recorder has warning information, a warning message will appear.  
Note:  
The DVD video camera/recorder does not record the date and time as a part of image. However, this information  
during recording will be recorded with image as data which can be checked on Disc Navigation screen during  
playback (see “INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING RECORDING” on page 46).  
Display when recording an image of yourself  
When recording with the LCD screen facing the same direction as the  
lens, the operating status will appear: The battery remaining level will  
appear only when the remaining level is very low, and the display will  
blink.  
Operating status/warning message  
Battery remaining level  
No warning/message (see page 46) will appear when recording with the LCD screen facing the same  
direction as the lens.  
Instead, the following screen display symbols will blink to inform you of the operation status of  
DVD video camera/recorder.  
When the LCD monitor is turned 180º from the position with the LCD screen facing the same  
direction as the lens, the warning/message can be checked.  
49  
Interpreting symbols on LCD screen when recording with the screen  
facing the same direction as the lens  
Screen  
display  
symbol  
Description  
Status in which recording is not possible on HDD.  
An attempt to record a photo on HDD was made.  
An attempt to record a still is being made with a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW  
N
used.  
An unusable disc is loaded.  
An unusable card is loaded.  
R
X
HDD/disc is write-protected.  
A locked card is loaded.  
During recording (lights in red).  
The remaining capacity on HDD/disc is approaching the limit 0 (blinks in red).  
k
During recording pause (lights in green).  
During focus lock (lights in purple).  
l
The remaining capacity on HDD/disc/card is approaching the limit 0 (blinks in red).  
There is no remaining capacity on HDD/disc/card (blinks in green).  
An attempt to record a copy-guarded image is being made (blinks in green).  
Note:  
If the LCD screen is set facing the same direction as the lens, the LCD screen will display a mirror image (left and  
right reversed).  
If the LCD screen is set facing the same direction as the lens, you can also view subject image in the viewfinder.  
Although you can switch to the manual focus, exposure and on-screen display modes even during recording with  
LCD screen facing the same direction as lens, they will not appear on the screen.  
When the LCD monitor is opened and turned 180º with the Program AE set to Low Light, the monitor screen will  
light white (see page 61).  
50  
Checking Flow of Menu  
The following two on-screen menu modes are available with this DVD video camera/recorder:  
• Full Menu: To display all menu items for experts  
• Quick Menu: To display only the fundamental menu items for first timers  
Operating Menu  
The Full Menu will appear if you press the MENU button.  
You can use the f/e/d/c buttons on DVD video camera/recorder to select various setting  
options in Full Menu and designate them.  
QUICK  
MENU  
The cursor to be  
chosen will move to  
Press the MENU button  
the right  
Press c or A  
Ca  
P r og r a  
W
E
m
e r a Fun c t  
AE  
h i t e Ba l .  
i
ons Se  
t
up  
Ca  
P r og r a  
W
E
m
e r a Fun c t  
AE  
h i t e Ba l .  
i
ons Se up  
t
A
A
m
Au  
Au  
On  
t
t
o
o
m
Au  
Au  
On  
t
t
o
o
A
A
I
S
I
S
D i g . Zoom  
4 0 x  
O f  
D i g . Zoom  
4 0 x  
O f  
M IC . F t e r  
i
l
f
M IC . F t e r  
i
l
f
ENTER  
RETURN  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Press d or C  
Press e  
Press f  
Rec o r d F u n c t  
V I DEO Mode  
1 6 : 9  
i
o n s Se  
t
F
up  
I NE  
Press the A button directly to choose an option from menu.  
To return to the screen one before, press the C button.  
Pressing the MENU button again will cause the Menu display to  
disappear.  
The cursor to  
be chosen will  
move down  
On  
CAMERA  
On  
I n p u t Sou r c e  
OSD Ou pu  
HDD r o t ec  
t
t
P
t
i
o n  
On  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Note:  
Pressing the QUICK MENU button will display the Quick Menu screen: The operation will be the same as when  
the MENU button is pressed.  
Pressing the MENU button during recording will not display the menu.  
The menu screen will disappear when it is left for approx. one minute without any operation.  
51  
Flow of Full Menu  
The shaded menu item can also be set using the Quick Menu.  
Refer to page indicated for details of each function.  
Camera Functions Setup  
Not displayed when external input is being  
selected.  
Date Setup  
Da t e Se t up  
Da  
Da  
t
t
e
e
Se t  
Mod e  
M /D/ Y  
Ca  
P r og r a  
W
E
m
e r a Fun c t  
AE  
h i t e Ba l .  
i
ons Se up  
t
A
m
Au  
Au  
On  
t
t
o
o
A
ENTER  
RETURN  
I
S
D i g . Zoom  
4 0 x  
O f  
M IC . F t e r  
i
l
f
ENTER  
RETURN  
Date setting (p. 35)  
Display format (p. 35)  
Program AE (p. 60)  
White balance (p. 61)  
*1  
EIS (p. 63)  
LCD/EVF Setup  
Digital zoom (p. 53)  
*2  
Microphone filter (p. 63)  
LCD/ EVF Se t up  
LCD / EVF Ad  
j
us  
t
*3  
EVF s p a y  
D
i
l
Au t  
o
Flash (p. 59)  
*1: Not displayed when DZ-HS303A is in “SD” status.  
*2: Not displayed in “SD” status.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
*3: Displayed when DZ-HS303A is recording a photo  
(not displayed when the optional Video Flash is  
connected).  
Adjust (p. 38)  
EVF Display (p. 39)  
Record Functions Setup  
Initial Setup  
Rec o r d F u n c t  
V I DEO Mode  
1 6 : 9  
i
o n s Se  
t
F
On  
up  
I NE  
I n p u t Sou r c e  
OSD Ou pu  
HDD r o t ec  
CAMERA  
On  
On  
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
Se up  
t
t
t
Beep  
Po er Save  
On  
Off  
P
t
i
o n  
w
Re c o r d LED  
L a ng u age  
On  
Eng  
ENTER  
RETURN  
l
i
s
h
De  
Reset  
ENTER  
m
o
Mode  
A u t o  
RETURN  
*4  
Movie quality (p. 64)  
16:9 (p. 65)  
*5  
Beep (p. 36)  
Input selection (p. 67)  
*6  
Power save (p. 36)  
Recording LED (p. 37)  
Language selection (p. 36)  
Demo mode (p. 37)  
Reset (p. 37)  
External still input (p. 68)  
*7  
Self-timer (p. 68)  
*8  
On-screen information display output (p. 69)  
*9  
HDD protection (p. 69)  
*4: The quality mode is displayed in “SD” status (p. 67).  
*5: Not displayed in “SD” status, or with external input.  
*6: Displayed in “SD” status, and input selection is set  
to external signal or S external signal.  
*7: Displayed in “SD” status.  
*8: Displayed only when input selection is set to  
camera.  
*9: Displayed only in “HDD” status.  
52  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Zooming  
If you continue to hold the zoom lever on the  
“T” control side with Dig. Zoom specified, the  
digital zoom will be activated midway (when  
optical 10-power is exceeded on DZ-HS303A or  
optical 25-power is exceeded on DZ-HS300A).  
You can zoom up to 500-power on DZ-HS303A;  
up to 1200-power on DZ-HS300A.  
1
Press the MENU button, choose “Dig. Zoom”  
on the “Camera Functions Setup” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
2
3
Choose the desired magnification, and then  
press the A button.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
W: recording wide area  
(wide-angle)  
Moving the zoom lever will display the  
digital zoom bar.  
Note:  
The digital zoom setting will be stored in memory  
even if the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
You can also use the DIGITAL ZOOM button on  
remote control to switch the digital zoom setting:  
Pressing the button during movie recording will switch  
the setting between “Off”, “40×”*1, and “500×”*2:  
Pressing the button during photo recording will switch  
between “Off” and “40×”*1.  
T: recording enlarged  
image (telephoto)  
If you set zoom to “500×”*2 when recording photo, the  
digital zoom will be up to 40×*1.  
When a subject is zoomed, it may be momentarily out  
of focus.  
When digital zoom is engaged, the image quality will  
be rougher.  
*1 “100x” on DZ-HS300A.  
*2 “1200x” on DZ-HS300A.  
MACRO RECORDING  
Use the macro function when recording a small object from close-up position: You can shoot the  
subject as close as approximately 13/16” (2 cm) from the lens surface, magnifying the image to fill  
the screen.  
1
Aim the DVD video camera/recorder at the  
subject, and press the zoom lever to “W”  
control side.  
Note:  
Zoom can be used, but the subject may not be  
focused, depending on the distance to the subject. In  
this case, move the zoom to “W” control side to focus.  
The amount of light tends to be insufficient during  
macro recording: If the subject image is too dark, use  
additional lighting.  
53  
RECORDING SUBJECTS FOR STRONGER WIDE-ANGLE OR TELEPHOTO  
EFFECT  
Use the tele-conversion lens or wide-conversion lens with the following filter diameter and thread  
pitch to record subjects for stronger telephoto or wide-angle effect:  
Filter diameter: 37 mm for DZ-HS303A; 34 mm for DZ-HS300A  
Thread pitch: 0.75 mm for DZ-HS303A; 0.5 mm for DZ-HS300A  
When attaching the optional DZ-TL1 tele-conversion lens or DZ-WL1 wide-conversion lens, use the  
optional step-up ring: DZ-SR3437 for DZ-HS300A (see page 138).  
1
Remove the lens hood from DVD video  
camera/recorder, and attach the step-up ring  
over the lens.  
2
Remove the cap of conversion lens, and screw  
the lens into the thread of step-up ring.  
When using the DZ-HS303A, you need not  
use the step-up ring.  
Lens hood  
Conversion lens  
Step-up ring  
(only when using DZ-  
HS300A)  
(Remove)  
(Attach)  
Tele-conversion lens: For stronger telephoto effect  
Wide-conversion lens: For stronger wide-angle effect  
Note:  
Be careful not to lose the removed lens hood.  
With DZ-TL1 tele-conversion lens, the focusing range  
at “T” (telephoto) control side is between approx.  
16 feet (5 m) and infinite.  
When a conversion lens is attached, note that the four  
corners of screen will be slightly dim if you zoom in on  
a subject on the W control side (wide-angle side).  
When replacing the lens, take care not to drop the  
DVD video camera/recorder.  
Attaching the conversion lens will disable the function  
of the built-in flash (for DZ-HS303A only): Specify  
“Flash: Off” (see page 59).  
If a generally available filter is attached, do not attach  
the removed lens hood.  
Some generally available conversion lenses may not  
be usable on this DVD video camera/recorder,  
depending on the lens maker.  
54  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Manually Focusing Subject  
The DVD video camera/recorder usually focuses on a subject automatically (autofocus). You can also  
manually focus a subject depending on the recording conditions.  
FOCUSING DURING RECORDING  
Normally, the DVD video camera/recorder automatically focuses the subject (autofocus), but you  
can also manually focus a subject, depending on the recording conditions (manual focus).  
Focusing range:  
You can switch the display mode of on-screen information:  
On T (tele) side: approximately 3.2 feet (1 m) from lens surface to infinity  
On W (wide) side: approximately 13/16” (2 cm) from lens surface to infinity  
1
Press the FOCUS button during recording.  
Manual Focus icon will appear on the screen.  
Manual Focus icon  
FOCUS  
Adjust with  
2
3
Press the zoom lever to “T” control side to  
zoom in on subject.  
d/c buttons  
Use the d/c buttons to adjust the focus,  
while viewing the image in the viewfinder or  
on the LCD screen.  
Note:  
Pressing FOCUS will alternate between manual focus  
and auto focus. With auto focus, no indication will  
appear on the screen.  
Be sure to zoom in on your subject before manually  
focusing on it. If you bring the subject into focus at the  
“W” control side, focus will be faulty when you turn the  
zoom lever to the “T” control side to zoom in on the  
subject.  
Manual focus is released when the DVD video  
camera/recorder is turned off. When you turn the DVD  
video camera/recorder on next time, auto focus will be  
restored.  
55  
Manually focus the following objects, which may not be automatically focused (see page 55):  
Objects not in  
the center of  
screen  
Objects with  
little variation  
in brightness,  
such as white  
wall  
Objects that  
are far and  
near at the  
same time  
Objects  
moving rapidly  
Objects lit by  
neon sign,  
spotlight, etc.  
which glares  
or emits  
Dark objects  
strong light  
Object behind  
glass with  
water  
Night view  
droplets, dirt  
on it  
56  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Adjusting Brightness of Image to be recorded  
(Exposure)  
The DVD video camera/recorder usually adjusts the exposure automatically. You can also manually  
adjust the exposure depending on the recording conditions.  
1
Press the EXPOSURE button during  
recording.  
The exposure adjustment bar will appear on  
the screen.  
EXPOSURE  
Adjust with d/c buttons  
Exposure adjustment bar  
Note:  
Pressing EXPOSURE will alternate between manual  
adjustment and auto exposure. With auto exposure,  
no indication will appear on the screen.  
The exposure setting will return to Auto when the  
DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
2
Use the d/c buttons to adjust the  
exposure, while viewing the image in the  
viewfinder or on the LCD screen.  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Compensating for Backlight  
When subject is lighted from rear, this function will compensate for lighting so that the subject is not  
too dark.  
BLC  
1
Press the BLC button during recording.  
Backlight correction icon  
The backlight correction icon will appear.  
Note:  
Pressing the BLC button will alternate between  
backlight setting between on and off.  
The backlight setting will automatically return to “off”  
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
57  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Using Full Auto Function  
Pressing the FULL AUTO button will fully automate the camera functions.  
1
Press the FULL AUTO button.  
“FULL AUTO” will be displayed on the screen  
of DVD video camera/recorder for several  
seconds.  
The following settings will reset to defaults:  
When setting Reference  
Function  
full auto  
Auto  
page  
55  
Focus  
Backlight  
compensation  
Off  
57  
Exposure  
Program AE  
White balance  
EIS  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
On  
57  
60  
61  
63  
63  
MIC.Filter  
Off  
58  
3
Built-in Video Flash (for DZ-HS303A only)  
When recording photos in a dark place, or if the subject is lit from rear, the DZ-HS303A makes use of  
the built-in Video Flash for automatic brightening: The Video Flash can also be set to On where the  
light is always being emitted, or Off when you wish to record without using the flash even in a dark  
place.  
Setting  
On-screen display  
Manner of emitting light  
Automatically emits light in dark place or in a spot lit  
from rear.  
( when the PHOTO/SELECT button  
Auto  
is pressed  
On  
Off  
Always emits light regardless of brightness.  
No light emission.  
(
)
However, dark subjects may not be in clear focus  
even if the Video Flash is used. It is recommended  
that you light a subject when recording in a dark  
place.  
The Video Flash built into DZ-HS303A cannot be  
used when a conversion lens is attached: Specify  
“Flash: Off”  
The distance for the built-in Video Flash to adjust the  
appropriate amount of light will vary depending on the  
subject, but it is approximately 3.2 – 8.2 feet (1 –  
2.5 m).  
The Video Flash automatically adjusts the amount of  
light emitted, but the light amount adjustment may be  
insufficient when a subject is too far away or too near.  
If you continuously record using the Flash, the Flash  
may not emit light or the amount of light may not be  
adjustable. After recording using the Flash, it is  
recommended that you wait for a few moments,  
before pressing the PHOTO/SELECT button to  
record.  
1
Press the MENU button, and choose Flash”  
from the Camera Functions Setupmenu.  
2
3
Choose the option for “Flash” and decide it.  
Press the MENU  
Ca  
P r og  
h i t e Ba l .  
D i o om  
m
e
r a F u nc  
t
i
on s Se t  
Auto  
On  
u
p
r
a
m
AE  
button to end the  
setting.  
W
g
.
Z
Off  
F
l
a sh  
*
ENTER  
RETURN  
* Displayed when  
using DZ-HS303A  
to record photo  
(not displayed  
when the optional  
Video Flash is  
connected).  
( ” will blink during charging of the battery for Video  
Flash.  
Optional Video Flash (for DZ-  
HS303A only)  
See “Introduction to Optional Accessories” on  
page 138.  
While “ ( ” is flashing, the video flash will not emit  
light, though the DVD camera/recorder is recording.  
When recording a close-up photo, specify “Flash:  
Off”. Using the flash too near subject could cause a  
whitish image.  
Do not use the Video Flash when approaching the  
human eye. Emitting light from Video Flash near  
human eye could damage the subject’s eyesight.  
Especially when recording a baby or small child,  
move the DVD video camera/recorder at least 3.2 feet  
(1 m) away.  
You can use the optional DZ-FLH3 Video Flash*  
(p. 138): Refer to the instruction manual of Video  
Flash for use.  
* Unavailable for DZ-HS300A.  
Do not use the Video Flash while pointing it at a driver  
in vehicle: Doing so could dazzle the driver, causing  
an accident.  
Do not use the Video Flash in a place where there is  
flammable or explosive gas: Doing so could cause fire  
or explosion.  
When the DZ-FLH3 optional video flash is attached to  
DZ-HS303A, the built-in video flash in DZ-HS303A  
will not operate.  
Note:  
The built-in Video Flash setting will not change even  
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
Unless recording is to be made with the fixed Flash  
setting, it is recommended to return it to “Auto” after  
recording with the “On” or “Off” setting, before turning  
the DVD video camera/recorder off.  
When recording dark subjects, the shutter speed will  
be slower, so don’t let the camera shake.  
59  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Setting Up Camera Functions  
See page 51 for how to set.  
Before You Begin  
No menu screen appears with external input.  
SELECTING SHOOTING MODE TO MATCH THE SUBJECT  
(SWITCHING PROGRAM AE MODE)  
This DVD video camera/recorder automatically detects the status of subject and surrounding  
situation and records the optimum image: If you choose the shooting mode to match the recording  
conditions, clearer images will be recorded.  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c buttons to choose “Program AE” on  
the “Camera Functions Setup” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
Auto : The camera/recorder automatically  
judges the subject and surrounding environment  
for optimum recording.  
Sports : Reduces blurring when recording  
rapidly moving subjects such as in golf or tennis.  
Portrait : Makes a subject, such as a person  
or a creature, stand out from a blurred  
background.  
The options will appear on the right of  
“Program AE”.  
2
3
Use the f/e/d/c buttons to choose  
the desired option, and then press the A  
button: The selected option will be set.  
Spotlight : Prevents overexposure of subject  
portrait face, etc. when strong light strikes the  
subject, as in a wedding or on stage.  
Sand & Snow : Prevents underexposure of  
subject portrait face, etc. in a place where  
reflection of light is intense, such as at the  
seaside in midsummer or on a ski slope.  
Low Light : Allows user to record in a dark  
place even with decreased lighting.  
Turn the LCD monitor 180º during recording:  
The LCD monitor light can then be used for  
recording.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
The menu screen will disappear.  
Note:  
You can check the selected AE mode by the on-  
screen information display. However, nothing will  
appear in the Auto mode.  
The shooting mode set as above will be stored in  
memory even if the DVD video camera/recorder is  
turned off.  
When recording in a dark area, an after-image will  
appear when filming a moving subject or if camera  
shake occurs (it is therefore recommended that you  
use a tripod in such cases).  
If the Sports mode is used under a fluorescent light,  
the image may flicker: In this case, use the Auto mode  
for recording.  
60  
RECORDING DARK SUBJECTS USING LCD MONITOR LIGHT  
When Program AE is set to Low Light, you can use the light from LCD monitor to record a subject.  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c buttons to choose “Program AE” on  
the “Camera Functions Setup” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
Note:  
Use the viewfinder to check the image to be recorded.  
The LCD monitor light allows you to record a subject  
up to 3.2 feet (1 m) even in a dark place.  
An after-image will appear when filming a moving  
subject or if camera shake occurs (it is recommended  
that you use a tripod).  
2
Use the f/e/d/c buttons to choose  
“Low Light”, and then press the A button.  
If a subject cannot be focused properly, manually  
adjust the focus (see page 55).  
3
4
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
Open the LCD  
monitor, turn it 180º  
so that it faces the  
same direction as  
the lens: The LCD  
monitor will light  
white.  
ADJUSTING COLOR (WHITE BALANCE)  
This DVD video camera/recorder automatically adjusts the color of subject. Change the white  
balance setting depending on the recording conditions.  
Mode  
Setting content  
On-screen display  
Auto  
Set  
White balance always automatically adjusted  
None  
You can manually adjust white balance to match the light  
source or situation (p. 62)  
h
i
Outdoor  
Indoor 1  
To record in fine weather  
To record under incandescent light, halogen light or bulb-  
color type fluorescent light  
j
k
Indoor 2  
To record under fluorescent light  
61  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c buttons to choose “White Bal.” on the  
“Camera Functions Setup” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Note:  
The white balance mode can be confirmed using the  
on-screen information.  
The white balance setting will be stored in memory  
even when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned  
off.  
2
3
Choose the desired option, and then press the  
A button.  
Do not block the infrared sensor with hand, etc.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
Infrared sensor block  
If a tele or wide-conversion lens is used, the auto  
white balance may not operate depending on the  
recording conditions. If this happens, set to the mode  
to match the recording conditions, or manually set the  
white balance.  
Be sure to remove the lens cap before turning the  
DVD video camera/recorder on: If the DVD video  
camera/recorder is turned on with the lens capped,  
the white balance will not work normally.  
Setting white balance manually  
1
Point the DVD  
video camera/  
recorder at a white  
object so that it fills  
the screen. Use an  
object that is not  
transparent.  
4
Press the C button to end the setting.  
Thick paper  
Note:  
The white balance set using the “Set” option will be  
stored in memory until it is re-set.  
Do not use a colored object when setting the white  
balance: The appropriate tint cannot be set.  
If “Input Source: LINE, S-LINE” has been specified,  
you cannot use the “Set” mode of white balance  
(p. 67) .  
If focus is not  
correct when the  
white object fills the screen, manually focus  
the object, referring to “Manually Focusing  
Subject” (see page 55).  
The setting on white balance “Set” may not be  
possible in a dark place. Also, the white balance  
cannot be set when the zoom bar is in the digital  
zoom range (p. 53). In such status, the “h” indicator  
will remain blinking. Set the white balance in a bright  
place with “Dig. Zoom: Off” specified.  
2
3
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c buttons to choose “White Bal.”, “Set”  
on the “Camera Functions Setup” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
If the recording conditions have changed, re-set the  
white balance for appropriate colors.  
The setting will be stored in memory even when the  
DVD video camera/recorder is turned off: The “h”  
indicator will blink when the DVD video camera/  
recorder is turned on next time. Re-set the white  
balance as needed.  
Hold A button pressed until the “h”  
indicator changes from blinking to a steady  
light. When the “h” indicator lights, the  
white balance setting will be complete.  
62  
USING THE ELECTRONIC IMAGE STABILIZER (EIS)  
When you use zoom (see page 53) to record a magnified subject image, it will correct fuzziness in the  
recorded image.  
After recording with EIS set to “Off”, it is  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c buttons to choose “EIS” on the  
“Camera Functions Setup” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
recommended that you return the setting to “On” and  
then turn the DVD video camera/recorder off, unless  
you normally record with “Off” setting.  
It is recommended that you specify “EIS: Off” when  
using the DVD video camera/recorder on a desk or  
tripod.  
When “EIS: On” is specified, there will be a slight  
difference between the actual movement and the  
movement on screen.  
Gross camera shake may not be entirely corrected  
even if “EIS: On” is specified: Firmly hold the DVD  
video camera/recorder with both hands.  
EIS may not operate correctly when the tele or wide-  
conversion lens is used.  
2
3
Choose the “On” or “Off”, and then press the  
A button.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
Note:  
You can check EIS On or Off by the on-screen  
information display.  
The EIS setting will be stored in memory even when  
the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
EIS cannot be used when recording photos on  
DZ-HS303A.  
RECORDING SUBJECT USING LARGE MAGNIFICATION (DIGITAL ZOOM)  
See page 53 for setting on digital zoom.  
REDUCING WIND NOISE DURING RECORDING (MIC.FILTER)  
When recording sound from the microphone built into this DVD video camera/recorder, you can  
reduce wind noise in recording.  
If “MIC.Filter: On” is specified, the low-frequency components in the sound picked up by  
microphone will be cut off during recording: This makes it easier to hear the target voice or sound  
during playback.  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c buttons to choose “MIC.Filter” on the  
“Camera Functions Setup” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Note:  
You can also use the on-screen display to confirm that  
the MIC.Filter has been set.  
The MIC.Filter setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
The MIC.Filter function will work only during movie  
recording.  
The microphone filter function works only with the  
built-in microphone: It will not function when using an  
external microphone (p. 70).  
2
3
Choose the desired option, and then press the  
A button.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
63  
Setting Up Record Functions  
HDD  
1<>2/  
SWITCHING MOVIE QUALITY (VIDEO MODE)  
Choose the movie quality from “XTRA”, “FINE”, “STD”.  
It is recommended that you record critical subjects in the “XTRA” or “FINE” mode.  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c/A buttons to choose “VIDEO  
Mode” on the “Record Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press the A button.  
Note:  
The movie quality setting will be stored in memory  
even when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned  
off.  
The “VIDEO Mode” setting will not change even if the  
DVD is replaced.  
2
3
Choose the desired quality mode, and then  
press the A button.  
When using DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R, you cannot  
switch the setting on movie quality or wide-screen  
mode while recording on the disc: The DVD video  
camera/recorder will be automatically set to the movie  
quality or wide-screen mode first used with the disc  
for recording.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
When using a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW:  
You cannot specify the combination of “VIDEO Mode:  
STD” and “16:9 On”(p. 85). If you specify “16:9 On”  
and try to switch the VIDEO Mode to STD from XTRA  
or FINE, the screen will automatically switch to the  
4:3-aspect ratio display.  
The movie quality setting is effective only during  
movie recording: The setting will not be displayed  
during recording of stills.  
Block-like noise may appear in recorded image, or the outline of subject image is distorted under the  
recording conditions listed below. Pan the DVD video camera/recorder as slowly as possible (Block  
noise is likely to appear in the “STD” mode):  
If there is a complicated pattern in background (as in following figure on left);  
If the DVD video camera/recorder is moved excessively or quickly;  
If subject is moving rapidly even when the DVD video camera/recorder is not moving.  
(Image when block-like noise occurs)  
(Image without block-like noise)  
64  
HDD  
1<>2/  
SETTING TO WIDE TV SCREEN MODE (16:9 MODE)  
When viewing recorded images later on a wide-screen TV (aspect ratio 16:9), specify wide-screen  
(16:9) mode “On”: You can also record images with the aspect ratio changed (the aspect ratio with  
“Off” is 4:3).  
The following figures compare the images displayed on LCD monitor and in viewfinder when the  
wide-screen mode is “on” and “off”.  
“16:9 On” specified  
(aspect ratio 16:9)  
“16:9 Off” specified  
(aspect ratio 4:3)  
When using DZ-HS303A  
When using DZ-HS300A  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c buttons to choose “16:9” on the  
“Record Functions Setup” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
2
3
Choose “On”, and then press the A button.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
When viewing playback on an ordinary TV screen later, specify “16:9 Off”: Recording with “16:9 On”  
specified will be played back on an ordinary TV with longer vertical direction of image.  
65  
An image recorded with “16:9 On” specified will appear as follows:  
Display on LCD monitor screen Display in viewfinder  
Images recorded with “16:9 Off” specified will appear as follows:  
Display on LCD monitor screen Display in viewfinder  
Note:  
The 16:9 setting will be kept even after the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
The 16:9 mode cannot be used with photo recording, external input*1, S-VIDEO external input*1.  
When using a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW:  
You cannot specify the combination of “VIDEO Mode: STD” and “16:9 On”(p. 85). If you specify “16:9 On” and try  
to switch the VIDEO Mode to “STD” from “XTRA” or “FINE”, the screen will automatically switch to the 4:3-aspect  
ratio display.  
Once the DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R disc has been recorded in the wide-screen mode, you will not be able to  
switch to recording of external input*1 or S-VIDEO external input*1 using the same disc.  
When using DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R, switching between wide mode (16:9) and normal mode (4:3) will not be  
possible while using the same disc.  
Images recorded with “16:9 On” (aspect ratio 16:9) specified will be played back with the setting used during  
recording regardless of the 16:9 setting then being used.  
The 16:9 setting is not compatible with ID-1/ID-2*2.  
If you connect this DVD vide camera/recorder to the S1 or S2 terminal of TV, the TV will automatically switch to  
the wide-screen mode: See TV instruction manual for details.  
When using a video selector, the TV may not automatically be switched to 16:9 mode.  
If you connect the DVD video camera/recorder with a disc recorded in wide mode to a TV with 4:3 display only  
and play it back, vertically long images will appear. To display 4:3 images, set “TV type” (p. 111) to 4:3 and view  
the images.  
If you play back a +RW recorded in wide mode on a DVD recorder/player, etc., vertically long images will appear  
even on a wide-screen TV. In this case, change the setting on the DVD recorder/player, or set “TV type” (p. 111) to  
4:3 and view the images.  
*1 The DZ-HS300A cannot receive any externally input signal.  
*2 This system records the aspect ratio (16:9, 4:3) information in void space between video signals.  
66  
3
SWITCHING QUALITY OF STILL IMAGE (QUALITY)  
You can switch the still recording quality.  
It is recommended that you use “FINE” when recording vital images (p. 157 “Size And Quality  
Of Photos”).  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c/A buttons to choose “Quality” on  
the “Record Functions Setup” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
Note:  
The still quality setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
2
Choose the option you want, and then press  
the A button.  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
RECEIVING IMAGE FROM ANOTHER DEVICE (INPUT SOURCE)  
If you wish to input an image from another device to this DVD video camera/recorder, you must  
first switch the setting on the DVD video camera/recorder.  
Refer to the explanation starting from page 115 on how to connect the DVD video camera/recorder  
to other devices or record images input from them.  
The DZ-HS300A cannot receive any externally input signal.  
Setting  
CAMERA  
LINE  
Content  
Usually select this option  
On-screen display  
No display  
To input image from another device  
L IN  
S IN  
S LINE  
To input S-VIDEO signal from another device  
1
2
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c/A buttons to choose “Input  
Source” on the “Record Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press the A button.  
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
Note:  
The “Input Source” setting will return to “CAMERA”  
whenever the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
Choose “LINE”, and then press the A  
button.  
67  
3
SWITCHING EXTERNAL INPUT RECORDING METHOD (PHOTO INPUT)  
When “Input Source: LINE or S LINE” is specified, you can record stills of externally input images  
on a card. The DVD video camera/recorder can record an external image with little movement by  
specifying “Frame”, but “Field” is recommended for recording image with movement.  
The DZ-HS300A cannot receive any externally input signal.  
Recording  
format  
Details of setting  
On-screen display  
Does not suit recording of frequently moving video  
subjects, despite high image quality. Frame suits recording  
of less moving video.  
Frame  
G
F
Field  
Suitable for recording of frequently moving video subjects.  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c/A buttons to choose “PHOTO  
Input” on the “Record Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press the A button.  
Note:  
The PHOTO Input setting can be confirmed using the  
on-screen information.  
The PHOTO Input setting will be stored in memory  
even when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned  
off.  
Refer to “Recording (Dubbing) Images”, page 115 to  
see how to connect the DVD video camera/recorder  
to another device.  
2
3
Select the desired option and then press the  
A button.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
3
SELF-TIMER  
You can record photos using the self-timer function, as with ordinary cameras.  
The self-timer function is valid only when recording photos (stills).  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c/A buttons to choose “Self Timer”  
on the “Record Functions Setup” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
Note:  
You can also check that self-timer has been set by  
reviewing the on-screen information.  
To release the self-timer mode, choose “Off” on the  
menu screen or turn DVD video camera/recorder off.  
To suspend self-timer, press the PHOTO/SELECT  
button again before recording starts, or press the C  
button.  
2
Select “On”, and then press the A button.  
The self-timer will be set.  
3
4
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
Press the PHOTO/SELECT button.  
The recording indicator at the front of DVD  
video camera/recorder will blink.  
The self-timer indicator will start to count  
down, and recording will commence  
approximately 10 seconds later.  
68  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
SETTING ON-SCREEN DISPLAY OUTPUT ON OR OFF (OSD OUTPUT)  
If you connect this DVD video camera/recorder to a TV to view images on TV screen, you can  
switch off the on-screen information (displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen) from the TV  
screen.  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c/A buttons to choose “OSD  
Output” on the “Record Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press the A button.  
Note:  
The “OSD Output” setting will be stored in memory  
even when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned  
off.  
Even if “Off” is chosen, the on-screen information will  
appear during playback. See page 78 for playback on-  
screen information display.  
Even after the on-screen information is removed from  
the TV screen, it will still appear in the viewfinder or  
on the LCD screen.  
The on-screen display output functions only when the  
input selection is set to camera: It cannot be set  
during external input.  
2
3
Choose “On” or “Off”, and press the A  
button.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
“On” setting  
“Off” setting  
TV screen  
TV screen  
HDD  
DROP DETECTION (HDD PROTECTION)  
The default setting is “On”. Specify “HDD Protection: Off” if you plan to use the HDD built in this  
DVD video camera/recorder in a weightless condition, such as skydiving, to prevent stop in  
recording or playback: Specifying “On” in such status will activate the drop detection function and  
stop recording or playback to protect the HDD built in this DVD video camera/recorder.  
1
Press the MENU button, use the f/e/  
d/c/A buttons to choose ”HDD  
Protection” on the ”Record Functions Setup”  
menu screen.  
2
Choose ”On” or ”Off”, use the f/e/d/  
c/A buttons to then press the A  
button.  
An icon will  
appear.  
When “Off” is specified, the icon will appear.  
Note:  
The “HDD Protection” setting will return to “On” when  
the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
(When “HDD Protection: Off” is specified)  
69  
HDD  
1<>2/  
Using External Microphone  
Connect external microphone (generally available) to the external microphone jack of this DVD  
video camera/recorder. Clearer sound can be recorded. Turn on the switch on external microphone  
and start recording. For details on external microphone, see “Major Specifications” on page 154.  
To external  
microphone jack  
Note:  
Depending on the shape of its plug, an external microphone cannot be plugged in, while the cable is left plugged  
in the AV/S input/output terminal. Unplug the AV/S input/output cable to use the external microphone.  
This DVD video camera/recorder cannot use a plug-in power type microphone. (Power is not supplied from this  
DVD video camera/recorder.)  
Connecting an external microphone will switch off the built-in microphone.  
The DZ-HS300A cannot use any external microphone.  
70  
Disc Navigation  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Using Disc Navigation  
STARTING OR TERMINATING DISC NAVIGATION  
Disc Navigation is a tool for editing scenes recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
Here is an explanation on “scene” and “program”, so that you will be able to make most use of Disc  
Navigation function.  
The screens in this instruction manual are basically those that will appear when the HDD is used:  
Some items will not appear when a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW or card is used, but the  
operation is the same.  
Turn the DVD video camera/recorder on (p. 33).  
When using HDD: Set the power switch to “HDD”.  
When using disc: Set the power switch to “DVD”.  
Before You Begin  
When using card: Set the power switch to “SD”.  
1
2
Set the power switch properly.  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
The Disc Navigation screen (shown on  
page 72) will appear.  
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button again.  
Disc Navigation will be terminated and the  
DVD video camera/recorder will enter the  
recording pause status.  
You can also press the C button to end Disc  
Navigation.  
71  
Disc Navigation screen  
Thumbnail  
Selected scene number/  
Number of all scenes  
Al l Pr og r a  
m
s
001 / 014  
Cursor  
Current page position*3  
Still image icon*1  
Operation guide*2  
Bar graph  
Icon of HDD, DVD/card type*4  
PLAY  
PHOTO  
SELECT  
*1 Icon displayed on a photo recorded on a DVD-RAM using Hitachi DVD video camera/recorder marketed before  
DZ-HS303A/HS300A.  
DZ-HS303A/HS300A cannot record any photos on a DVD-RAM.  
*2 The operation guide will vary depending on the operation status of DVD video camera/recorder.  
*3 Appears when 13 scenes or more have been recorded.  
*4 When using a disc, the icon that corresponds to the type of disc being used will appear. “ ” will appear for  
card.  
Icons to be displayed on thumbnail:  
[ ....................... Fade-in (p. 88)  
................. Skip (p. 89)  
] ....................... Fade-out (p. 88)  
T ...................... Lock (p. 92)  
Note:  
Each time the DISPLAY button is pressed, the recording date/time of the scene on which the cursor is placed,  
recording data of scene (VIDEO Mode, 16:9, recording length), and operation guide will appear in sequence  
(when HDD is used).  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
ms  
002 / 008  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
m
s
002 / 008  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
m
s
002 / 008  
PLAY  
PHOTO  
SELECT  
12/ 1/2006 10:00:00AM  
FINE 16:9 0min 39sec  
Displayed only when HDD  
is used  
Each time Disc Navigation is started with a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R inserted, message “Creating Thumbnail  
...will appear. After the message appears, the Disc Navigation screen will appear.  
In the following cases, the Disc Navigation screen will appear or a message will be displayed:  
- HDD or disc is write-protected  
- Finalized DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW  
- DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R recorded on a Hitachi DVD video camera/recorder model marketed before DZ-  
HS303A/HS300A, and not finalized  
- Locked card  
Do not leave the Disc Navigation screen displayed on TV to which the DVD video camera/recorder is connected:  
Doing so could damage the TV screen, possibly by burning.  
72  
PLAYING BACK FROM DISC NAVIGATION SCREEN  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
3
Press the A button.  
Use the f/e/d/c buttons to select  
the desired scene.  
Playback will start from the selected scene.  
Note:  
Pressing the d or c button will move the cursor  
to the preceding or following scene.  
Pressing the f or e button will move to  
preceding or following page.  
The selected scene will be framed: This is  
called a “cursor”.  
ADJUSTING VOLUME DURING PLAYBACK  
If the LCD monitor is open during playback of  
movie, playback sound will be heard from the  
speaker. Adjust the sound volume using the zoom  
lever. Tilt it to the “T” side to increase the volume,  
“W” side to reduce the volume.  
When playback ends  
Playing back photos  
The DVD video camera/  
recorder will enter the  
playback pause status at  
the last image of last scene.  
Pressing the C or DISC  
NAVIGATION button will  
restore the Disc  
A photo on DVD-RAM will be displayed for  
approx. 3 seconds. When playing back photos  
on card, playback will stop after each photo  
playback.  
Note:  
Playback pause  
Press the A button to temporarily stop playback.  
Pressing the A button again will start from that  
point.  
Navigation screen.  
If you press the A button after playback of the last  
scene on disc finishes, playback will start again from  
the beginning.  
Pressing the C button will always restore the Disc  
Navigation screen.  
When the playback pause status continues for as  
long as 5 minutes, the Disc Navigation screen  
will automatically be restored.  
When playing back photos on card, “Playback” will  
appear. In the case of a photo with a large number of  
pixels, it will take some time for the photo to appear.  
73  
Insert a disc or card recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder to play  
back scenes on it. (p. 43, 44).  
Turn the DVD video camera/recorder on (p. 33).  
Before You Begin  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
PLAYING BACK LATEST RECORDED SCENE  
Playing Back  
Note:  
To temporarily stop playback, press the A button.  
Press the A button again to restart playback.  
Even if you stop playback midway and immediately  
start recording again, the new image will be recorded  
after the last scene on HDD, disc or card (the  
previous images will not be overwritten).  
Image data edited on PC, etc., or the recorded image  
may not appear on this DVD video camera/recorder;  
also, the recorded sound may not play back,  
depending on the type of image data.  
Image data recorded on another DVD video camera/  
recorder or DVD recorder may not be played on this  
DVD video camera/recorder.  
Depending on the amount of data to be played back,  
it may take some time for the playback image to  
appear.  
Do not operate the power switch or remove the card  
while the ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is  
lit or blinking: Doing so may damage the card or the  
data on card.  
If the temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder  
is too high, normal playback may not be possible:  
Turn the DVD video camera/recorder off once, wait  
until the ambient temperature becomes lower, and  
then operate it again.  
1
2
Press the A button in the recording pause  
status.  
The DVD video camera/recorder will enter  
the playback mode, and the scene you have  
recorded last will be played back.  
When playback is finished, the DVD video  
camera/recorder will enter the pause status  
at the last image on disc.  
If the playback pause status continues for as  
long as 5 minutes, the DVD video camera/  
recorder will automatically return to the  
recording pause status.  
Press the C button.  
Playback will stop, and recording pause  
status will be restored.  
HDD  
1</3  
DELETING LAST RECORDED SCENE  
1
2
Press the MENU button during playback.  
3
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
The last recorded scene will be deleted, and  
the recording pause status will be restored.  
Choose “Edit”, “Delete Scene”, and then  
press the A button.  
The screen for verifying deletion will appear.  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button during playback using the  
Disc Navigation menu, “Delete Scene” will not appear.  
74  
HDD  
1<>2/  
CAPTURING PHOTO  
You can record an image displayed during playback of video as a photo on a card.  
1
2
Press the MENU button at a scene you wish  
to capture during playback.  
Note:  
You can also press PHOTO/SELECT button for the  
scene you wish to capture in step 1: The screen for  
verifying capture will appear. Choose “YES”, and then  
press the A button. The scene will be recorded on  
a card.  
Choose “Edit”, “PHOTO Capture”, and then  
press the A button.  
The screen for verifying capture will appear.  
A captured photo is played back on the DVD video  
camera/recorder as follows:  
When captured from a video recorded with 16:9 (wide  
mode) On specified:  
Number of pixels (JPEG  
standard): 640 x 360  
3
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
The captured scene will be recorded on a  
card.  
When captured from a  
video recorded with 16:9  
(wide mode) Off specified:  
Number of pixels (JPEG  
standard): 640 x 480  
HDD  
1<>2/  
SEARCH PLAYBACK OF MOVIE  
During playback, press the d or c button and  
hold it: Search playback will start.  
Note:  
If the temperature inside the DVD video camera/  
recorder rises, normal skip or search playback may  
not be possible: Turn the DVD video camera/recorder  
off, wait for a few moments, and then turn it on again.  
Hold down c :  
Scenes will be visually scanned forward.  
Hold down d :  
Scenes will be visually scanned backward.  
Release the d or c button when you find the  
desired image:  
Normal playback will start from that point.  
HDD  
1<>2/  
FRAME ADVANCE/FRAME BACK/SLOW PLAYBACK OF MOVIE  
During playback pause, press the d or c  
button: Frame advance, frame back or slow  
playback will start.  
After frame advance, frame back or slow  
playback, the DVD video camera/recorder will  
enter the playback pause status.  
Note:  
Press c once:  
In slow playback, a rapidly moving subject image may  
be distorted.  
The intervals for playing back frames in frame  
advance/frame back/slow playback are as follows:  
Frame advance and forward slow: Approx. 0.03  
seconds  
Frame back and reverse slow: Approx. 0.5 seconds  
No sound will be heard during search playback or  
slow playback.  
Picture will advance one frame.  
Press d once:  
Picture will go back one frame.  
Hold down c :  
Forward slow playback.  
Hold down d :  
Reverse slow playback.  
75  
HDD  
1<>2/  
SKIP PLAYBACK OF MOVIE  
During playback, press the f or e button to  
locate the start of desired scene.  
Portion being played back  
Press e once:  
Press f  
Press f Press e Press e  
To skip to the first image of the scene  
following the one being played back, and start  
playback.  
twice  
once once  
twice  
Scene 1  
Scene 2  
Scene 3  
Press f once:  
To return to the first image of the scene being  
played back, and start playback.  
Hold down e :  
Portion being played back  
Press f  
Press e  
Press e  
To continuously locate the beginnings of  
scenes, starting from the scene following the  
scene being played back. When the desired  
image appears, release the button: Playback  
will start from that point.  
once  
once  
twice  
Scene 1  
Scene 2  
Scene 3  
Pressing the f button at a portion several seconds  
from the start of scene being played back will return  
to the start of the scene preceding that being played  
back.  
Hold down f :  
To continuously locate the beginnings of  
scenes backward, starting from the scene  
preceding the scene currently being played  
back. When the desired image appears, release  
the button: Playback will start from that point.  
Note:  
If you perform skip playback during playback pause,  
the DVD video camera/recorder will enter the  
playback pause status at the beginning of the located  
scene.  
Pressing the e button in the last scene on HDD or  
disc will set the DVD video camera/recorder to the  
playback pause status at the last image.  
If the temperature inside the DVD video camera/  
recorder rises, normal skip or search playback may  
not be possible: Turn the DVD video camera/recorder  
off, wait for a few moments, and then turn it on again.  
13  
PLAYING BACK STILLS  
Press the f or e button during playback to  
[When using DVD-RAM]  
quickly play back stills in sequence.  
(This DVD video camera/recorder cannot record  
any photo on a DVD-RAM.)  
Releasing the f or e button will start  
continuous playback.  
Press e once:  
To display stills one by one forward.  
Press f once:  
To display stills one by one backward.  
[When using card]  
When the f or e button is released, the  
photo at that point will be displayed, and then  
the DVD video camera/recorder will enter the  
playback pause status.  
Use the slide show function for continuous  
display (p. 111).  
76  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
JUMPING TO SPECIFIED POINT (GO TO)  
1
2
Press the MENU button  
during playback.  
Top:  
To go to the start, and enter playback pause.  
End:  
To go to the end of last scene, and enter  
Go To  
To p  
En d  
Spec  
i
f
y
Choose the option  
(point you want to go  
ENTER  
RETURN  
playback pause.  
to), and then press the A button.  
Specify:  
To go to a specified point and enter playback  
pause. See the following for details.  
Specifying the point to view  
1
Choose “Specify” in step 2 above, and then  
press the A button.  
3
Press the A button to enter the selection.  
The DVD video camera/recorder will go to  
the specified point and enter the playback  
pause status.  
The screen for specifying the point to go to  
will appear.  
Pressing the A button again will start  
playback.  
Position of currently  
played back image  
Total recording time of  
all selected scenes  
Go  
t
o
Note:  
TOP  
0: 00: 00  
CURRENT  
0: 03 : 26  
END  
0: 24 : 24  
To cancel the “Go To” procedure midway, press the C  
button before going to the specified point.  
If multiple scenes are selected using the Disc  
Navigation function or PHOTO/SELECT button,  
choosing “Top” will jump to the beginning of selected  
scenes (p. 105).  
Cursor  
GO TO 0: 03 : 26  
TOP END ENTER  
CANCEL  
Cursor position  
When multiple scenes are selected, the total time of  
selected scenes will appear in the “total recording  
time” display.  
2
Use the f/e/d/c buttons to select  
the desired time of chosen point.  
With card, the number of stills will appear at the  
“TOP”, “CURRENT”, “END” and “GO TO” indicators.  
The cursor may not move at same-pitch intervals.  
Press f  
Press e  
Press d or c  
Press once:  
:
:
:
To select the start.  
To select the end.  
To move the cursor in 10-second units  
(1-still units for card)  
Hold down:  
To move the cursor in 1-minute units  
(10-still units for card)  
Go  
t
o
TOP  
0: 00: 00  
CURRENT  
0: 03 : 26  
END  
0: 24 : 24  
GO TO 0: 00 : 00  
TOP END ENTER  
CANCEL  
(When the start of scene is selected)  
77  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING PLAYBACK  
Various types of information on recording will be superimposed on playback image you are viewing.  
9:30AM  
12/ 1 / 2006  
No display  
Playback information  
display  
Recording date/time  
*1  
Switching the information display  
mode  
Press the DISPLAY button: You can switch the  
display mode of on-screen information.  
Program or  
Play List.  
*2  
Number of program or play list being played  
back (not displayed when all programs are  
being played back).  
Refer to “HDD, DVD/Card type” on page 48.  
Will appear when each function is specified  
“On”.  
*3  
*4  
When using HDD/DVD:  
*5  
Recording mode  
F
b
: Standard playback  
: Playback pause  
Scene No.  
Repeat play*4  
c
d
: Forward search playback  
: Reverse search playback  
06  
006  
0 : 00 : 16  
e : Forward skip playback  
f
g
h
: Reverse skip playback  
: Forward frame advance  
: Reverse frame back  
Playback  
operation*5  
: Forward slow playback  
: Reverse slow playback  
See pages 73-76 for how to operate.  
The “j” mark will appear on the first image  
on disc.  
The “i” mark will appear on the last image  
on disc.  
Counter  
HDD, Disc type*3  
Program No. or Play List No.*2  
Program or Play List*1  
When using card:  
Recording date/time display: Shows the date/  
time when recording was started. Even when  
playback starts, the date/time display will not  
advance.  
Scene No.  
File name  
Slide Show*4  
No display: No information will appear.  
However, when the mode of playback  
operation is switched, the symbol will appear  
for approx. 3 seconds.  
100—0003  
003  
Recording mode  
Playback operation*5  
Lock*4  
Note:  
See page 95 and after for “Program”, page 98 and after  
for “Play List”.  
78  
SELECTING MULTIPLE SCENES  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to randomly select  
multiple scenes.  
Use the f/e/d/c buttons to select  
the desired scene.  
3
Press the PHOTO/SELECT button once:  
The selected scene will be framed in red and  
yellow.  
SELECTING CONSECUTIVE SCENES TOGETHER  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Note:  
You can know the status of scenes from the colors of  
cursor and bargraph:  
Use the f/e/d/  
Al  
l
Pr ogr a  
m
s
005 / 014  
c buttons to point the  
cursor at the first scene  
in the range of scenes  
you want to select.  
Cursor Bar graph  
Status of scenes  
Yellow Light blue Current cursor position  
PLAY PHOTO SELECT  
Range of scenes being  
Blue  
Red  
Light blue  
selected  
Yellow Scenes already selected  
Yellow frame  
3
4
Hold down the  
PHOTO/SELECT  
button for at least one  
second:  
Al  
l
Pr ogr a  
m
s
005 / 014  
Pressing the A button after selecting scenes will  
play back only the selected scenes from the  
beginning of each.  
To cancel a selected scene, select the scene to be  
canceled, and then press the PHOTO/SELECT  
button.  
To cancel all selected scenes, press the C button.  
You can also select scenes in reverse from the last  
scene in the range.  
To release multiple selection, press the C or PHOTO/  
SELECT button before pressing the A button in  
step 4.  
ENTER  
CANCEL  
The selected scene will  
be doubly framed in  
yellow and blue.  
Double frames in  
yellow and blue  
Use the f/e/d/  
c buttons to select the  
last scene in the range  
you want, and then  
Al  
l
Pr ogr a  
m
s
010/ 014  
Up to 999 scenes can be selected.  
PLAY  
DESELECT ALL  
press the A button:  
Red frame  
The thumbnails of  
scenes in the specified  
range will be framed in  
red, and then selected.  
When scenes up to  
this point are selected  
79  
FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE WITH DISC NAVIGATION  
The Disc Navigation mode will allow a variety of further operations.  
Functions Available with Disc Navigation  
Available  
function  
Reference  
page  
Contents  
Editing of scenes  
You can delete unnecessary scenes,  
combine scenes, or divide one scene.  
85 – 87  
88 – 90  
91  
1
*
E
Setting special  
effects to scenes  
You can attach fade and skip to a  
scene, and change existing thumbnails.  
Copy from disc to  
card  
You can copy photos recorded on DVD-  
RAM disc to card.  
Scene lock  
You can lock any scene so that it will not  
be deleted by mistake: Essential scenes  
are thereby protected, and recording  
another still is possible.  
92  
Scene  
information  
display  
You can display information on one  
scene or multiple scenes, such as  
image quality, recording time, etc.  
94  
Changing title  
You can change the title of play list or  
program.  
96, 104  
98  
Creation of play  
list  
You can create an original movie by  
changing the combination of scenes.  
Initialization  
You can delete all data recorded on  
HDD/DVD/Card.  
105  
Protection  
You can protect the HDD/DVD-RAM/  
DVD-RW (VR-mode) to prevent deletion  
or editing by mistake.  
106  
Remaining  
display  
(Capacity)  
The remaining recordable movie time or  
number of recordable stills is displayed.  
106  
108  
Disc finalization  
Unfinalizing disc  
Repeat play  
You can use this DVD video camera/  
recorder to finalize any DVD-RW/DVD-  
R/+RW recorded on it so that the disc  
can be viewed on DVD recorder/player,  
etc.  
2
*
You can unfinalize a DVD-RW (VF-  
mode)/+RW that was finalized on this  
DVD video camera/recorder so that  
additional videos can be recorded on  
the disc.  
109  
You can repeatedly play back programs  
and scenes.  
110  
111  
Slide show  
You can play back stills continuously.  
1
*
*
Only deletion is possible.  
Additional recording can be made on a finalized DVD-RW (VR-mode).  
2
Note:  
Note  
Editing scenes and adding special effects to scenes are unique functions of this DVD video camera/recorder. When  
a disc with any effects set on this DVD video camera/recorder is directly played back on a DVD recorder/player or  
read into PC, the set effect results will not be reflected in the playback or reading. To reflect the set effect results,  
connect both devices using the AV/S input/output cable and then perform recording (Dubbing, p. 115).  
80  
UNDERSTANDING FLOW OF DISC NAVIGATION MENU  
Press the MENU button on the Disc Navigation screen: The menu screens for Disc Navigation and  
menu screens for HDD/DVD/Card will appear.  
Shaded items will also appear in Quick Menu display mode (see page 51).  
Refer to pages indicated for details of settings.  
When using HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode)  
Scene  
Edit  
Effect  
Dubbing*1(p. 83)  
Copy*2 (p. 91)  
Select (p. 93)  
(p. 85)  
(p. 88)  
Divide  
Delete  
Combine  
Move*3  
(p. 86)  
(p. 85)  
(p. 87)  
(p. 87)  
*3 Will appear when a  
play list is displayed.  
Detail  
(p. 94)  
Fade  
Skip  
Thumbnail  
(p. 88)  
(p. 89)  
(p. 90)  
*
*
1 HDD only  
2 DVD-RAM only  
All  
Select  
(p. 83)  
(p. 84)  
Start Current  
Current End  
All  
(p. 93)  
(p. 93)  
(p. 93)  
Play list  
Select (p. 99)  
Play (p. 99)  
Create (p. 98)  
Go To  
Top  
End  
(p. 105)  
(p. 105)  
Edit  
Title  
Delete (p. 104)  
(p. 100 – 103)  
(p. 104)  
HDD Setting  
DVD Setting  
Finalize DVD*5  
Format HDD  
(Format DVD)  
Protect HDD  
(Protect DVD)  
Capacity  
(p. 108)  
(p. 105)  
(p. 106)  
(p. 106)  
(p. 107)  
(p. 107)  
Program  
Others  
Select (p. 95)  
Play  
Title  
Update Control Info.  
(p. 96)  
(p. 96)  
Full Format*6  
*
*
5 DVD-RW (VR-mode) only  
6 HDD only  
Category*4  
Repeat Play  
TV type  
(p. 110)  
(p. 110)  
(p. 111)  
All  
VIDEO  
PHOTO  
(p. 110)  
(p. 110)  
(p. 110)  
*
4 DVD-RAM only  
On  
Off  
(p. 110)  
(p. 110)  
16:9  
4:3  
(p. 111)  
(p. 111)  
81  
When using DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW  
Scene  
Select (p. 93)  
Detail (p. 94)  
Start Current (p. 93)  
Current End (p. 93)  
All  
(p. 93)  
Program  
Select (p. 95)  
DVD Setting  
Finalize DVD  
(p. 108)  
Play  
(p. 96)  
Unfinalize DVD*7 (p. 109)  
Format DVD*7  
Capacity  
*7 DVD-RW (VF-mode)/+RW only  
(p. 105)  
(p. 106)  
Go To  
Top  
End  
(p. 105)  
(p. 105)  
Others  
Repeat Play  
TV type  
(p. 110)  
(p. 111)  
On  
Off  
(p. 110)  
(p. 110)  
16:9 (p. 111)  
4:3 (p. 111)  
When using card  
Scene  
Delete (p. 85)  
Lock (p. 92)  
Select (p. 93)  
Start Current (p. 93)  
Detail  
(p. 94)  
Current End (p. 93)  
All  
(p. 93)  
Go To  
Card  
Top  
End  
(p. 105)  
(p. 105)  
Slide Show  
Start  
(p. 111)  
Format Card  
Capacity  
(p. 105)  
(p. 106)  
82  
Dubbing on DVD  
You can dub the images recorded on the HDD to a DVD.  
Set the power switch to “HDD”.  
Prepare a recordable disc.  
The recording time for a scene that can be dubbed on one disc is  
approx. 30 minutes ( in FINE mode). If the HDD contains a scene  
exceeding the length that is recordable on one disc, it cannot be  
dubbed: Divide the scene (see p. 86), and then perform dubbing.  
Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/  
recorder during dubbing: Dubbing is not possible with a battery  
connected.  
Before You Begin  
If power is turned off and dubbing is interrupted midway, proper dubbing  
will not be possible.  
DUBBING ALL SCENES RECORDED ON HDD (DUBBING ALL)  
You can dub all scenes recorded on the HDD to a disc from the beginning in sequence.  
If the scenes cannot be included on one disc, count the capacity size of scenes, and dub the scenes  
that can be stored on the disc. Replace the disc during dubbing, following the screen for replacing  
disc: Dubbing will restart from the following scene. This operation will be repeated until all scenes  
on the HDD are dubbed.  
1
Press the DUBBING button.  
2
The screen for verification will appear: Choose  
“YES”, and then press the button.  
“Dubbing scenes to DVD?” will appear.  
To stop dubbing, choose “NO”, or press C  
(STOP/EXIT).  
If you press the f button at this time, you  
can confirm the scenes to be dubbed, which  
will be enclosed in red cursor.  
“Please insert DVD.” will appear.  
Press the DISC EJECT button, and then insert  
a disc.  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button, then  
the MENU button, and choose “Scene”,  
“Dubbing” and “All”: The same screen will  
appear.  
A
Press C (STOP/EXIT) to restore the screen for  
verification.  
Dubbing (All)  
Dubbing (All)  
Press f  
Dubbing scenes to DVD?  
YES NO  
Press C  
ENTER  
CHECK SCENE  
RETURN  
3
4
Replace the disc.  
5
Press the DISC EJECT button to remove the  
disc.  
Close the cover of disc insertion block.  
Press C (STOP/EXIT) to end dubbing.  
If one disc cannot contain all scenes, the  
screen for verifying disc replacement will  
appear. To continue dubbing, press the DISC  
EJECT button, and then replace the disc. To  
stop dubbing, press C (STOP/EXIT).  
Note:  
If message “Scene No.xxx is too large. Please divide  
this Scene before dubbing.” appears during dubbing,  
the dubbing will stop. Divide the specified scene (see  
page 86). After dividing the scene, use “scene select  
dubbing” to dub subsequent scenes.  
After dubbing is finished, check the “Delete  
Scene” screen.  
Choosing “YES” will delete the dubbed  
scenes from the HDD.  
To retain the dubbed scenes on the HDD,  
choose “NO”.  
83  
SELECTING SCENES RECORDED ON HDD AND DUBBING THEM (SCENE  
SELECT DUBBING)  
You can select desired scenes recorded on HDD and dub only those scenes on discs.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button, and  
then the MENU button.  
Note:  
The scenes on HDD will be dubbed to disc in the  
order of display on HDD Disc Navigation screen. To  
dub the scenes in a different order, create a play list  
on which scenes are registered in the desired order of  
dubbing (see p. 98), and then execute dubbing.  
If a finalized disc or a heavily scratched or dirty disc is  
inserted into this DVD video camera/recorder, a  
message will appear and dubbing will not be possible:  
Use another disc.  
Choose “Scene”, “Dubbing”, “Select”, and  
then press the A button.  
“Please insert DVD.” will appear on the  
screen: Press the DISC EJECT button and  
insert a disc.  
A DVD-RW/DVD-R dubbed on this DVD video  
camera/recorder will not be finalized: To play it back  
on a DVD recorder, be sure to finalize it on this DVD  
video camera/recorder.  
The details of editing scenes on HDD (fade, skip,  
change of thumbnail, etc.) will not be reflected in the  
scenes if they are dubbed on a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/  
DVD-R/+RW.  
3
Place the cursor on a scene to be dubbed, and  
then press the A or PHOTO/SELECT  
button: The cursor of the selected scene will  
change to red (see p. 79), and the scene with  
red cursor will be dubbed to a disc.  
If you wish to dub  
Dubbing (Select)  
The maximum number of scenes and programs that  
can be dubbed will vary depending on the disc used.  
If you combine scenes with different recording dates  
on a play list, and dub the combined scene to a DVD-  
RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode), the scenes will be dubbed  
separately for each date. However, if a combined  
scene is subsequently divided, the scenes may not be  
dubbed separately for each date.  
If you dub scenes combined using the Disc  
Navigation function to a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/  
+RW, the two scenes immediately before the  
combination (sometimes more than two scenes) will  
be dubbed.  
If you divide a scene using the Disc Navigation  
function, and then dub both the divided scenes to a  
DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW, the scene before  
the division will be dubbed.  
The time shown on dubbing is for reference: Dubbing  
will be performed at normal speed in XTRA mode;  
approx. 1.5 times the normal in FINE mode; approx. 2  
times the normal in STD mode.  
If the number of scenes on HDD is too large, or the  
temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder is too  
high, the required recording time may be longer than  
the display time on screen.  
Please note in advance that Hitachi will not accept  
any responsibility for compensation or loss of data, or  
direct or indirect damage when dubbing is not  
performed normally due to a fault in this DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
other scenes, place the  
cursor on a scene in the  
same way, and press  
the A or PHOTO/  
SELECT button to select it.  
To cancel a selected scene, press the A or  
PHOTO/SELECT button again. To cancel all  
selected scenes, press C (STOP/EXIT).  
If the total capacity size of the selected scenes  
exceeds the remaining free space on disc, the  
remaining bar at the top right of screen will  
be red, and a message will appear. Select the  
scenes again.  
DUB  
ENTER  
SELECT  
4
Press the DUBBING button.  
“Dubbing scenes to DVD?” will appear.  
Instead of pressing the DUBBING button, you  
can press the MENU button, choose "Edit",  
and then "Enter": The same screen will appear.  
Choosing “YES” will start dubbing.  
To cancel dubbing, choose “NO” or press C  
(STOP/EXIT).  
5
6
When dubbing is finished, check the “Delete  
Scene” screen.  
Choosing “YES” will delete the dubbed  
scenes from the HDD.  
To retain the dubbed scenes on the HDD,  
choose “NO”.  
Press the DISC EJECT button to remove the  
disc.  
Close the cover of disc insertion block.  
Press C (STOP/EXIT) to end dubbing.  
84  
List of dubbing possible/impossible  
Videos on HDD  
Disc to be  
dubbed  
VIDEO Modes  
(XTRA/FINE/STD) mixed  
Wide/normal modes  
(16:9/4:3) mixed  
VIDEO Mode "STD" and  
wide mode (16:9)  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-RW  
(VR-mode)  
DVD-RW  
(VF-mode)  
DVD-R  
+RW  
*  
*  
: Dubbing possible; —: Dubbing impossible  
* You cannot specify the combination of “VIDEO Mode: STD” and “16:9 On”.  
Scene  
HDD  
1<3  
DELETING SCENES (EDIT – DELETE)  
You may want to delete unwanted scenes.  
Scenes on DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R cannot be deleted, and menu item “Delete” will not appear  
with DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R.  
When using +RW, no scene can be deleted from the Disc Navigation menu (see page 74).  
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Place the cursor on the scene to be deleted.  
Press the MENU button.  
7
Press the C button to quit.  
Note:  
If you point the cursor at the scene to be deleted on  
DISC NAVIGATION screen, and then press the  
DELETE button on remote control, the screen in step  
5 will appear.  
Choose “Scene”, “Edit”, “Delete”, and then  
press the A button.  
When using card, choose “Scene”, “Delete”,  
and then press the A button.  
To delete an unwanted part of a scene on DVD-RAM/  
DVD-RW (VR-mode), divide the scene first, and then  
delete the unnecessary part (see page 86).  
If you delete all data on HDD/DVD/card, initializing the  
HDD/DVD/card will be recommended (see page 105).  
If the time of deleted scenes (stills) is quite short, the  
remaining free space of HDD/DVD/card may not  
increase in the HDD/DVD/card or card remaining  
indicator.  
5
6
The “Delete Scene” screen will appear: If you  
are sure you want to delete the selected scene,  
press the A button.  
The locked scenes on card cannot be deleted (see  
page 92).  
If you want to change the scene to be deleted,  
you can change it on this screen.  
The screen for verifying deletion will appear:  
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel deletion.  
After Yes or No setting, the “Delete Scene”  
screen will be restored.  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to delete other scenes.  
85  
Editing using submenu  
Press the MENU button before pressing the A button in step 5 (see page 85): The submenu will  
appear.  
Edit  
Delete*1 ....................To delete selected scenes  
Exit............................To restore the Disc Navigation screen  
Start Current.......To select scenes from the start to the one that the cursor is on  
at the moment  
Select  
Current End........To select scenes from the scene the cursor is on to the end  
All .............................To select all scenes  
Top............................To move the cursor to the first scene  
End............................To move the cursor to the last scene  
Go To  
Pressing the C button will restore the screen in step 5.  
*1 The menu item to be displayed will vary depending on the setting.  
Note:  
Although the submenu screen will appear for each setting, some menu items may not appear, depending on the  
setting.  
HDD  
1<  
DIVIDING MOVIES (EDIT – DIVIDE)  
You can divide a scene into two parts.  
To delete unnecessary portion of scene, first divide the scene, and then delete the unnecessary  
portion.  
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Place the cursor on the scene to be divided.  
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel division.  
After division, the “Divide Scene” screen will  
be restored.  
Repeat steps 5 – 7 to divide another scene.  
8
Press the C button to quit.  
Choose, “Scene”, “Edit”, “Divide” and then  
press the A button.  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the  
A button in step 5, the submenu will appear.  
Search and frame advance are useful when  
designating division points.  
5
The “Divide Scene” screen will appear: If you  
are sure you want to divide the selected  
scene, press the A button: The selected  
scene will be played back.  
Combining scenes that were divided will restore the  
original scene (see page 87).  
If a special effect has been added to the original  
scene, the “IN” effect will be added to the first half of  
scene, and the “OUT” effect, to the latter half.  
The division point may drift before or after the  
designated point by approximately 0.5 seconds.  
Since a scene with a skip set cannot be played back,  
no division point can be specified: Release the skip  
for the scene before dividing it.  
If the division point is at a still, a message will appear,  
but no division will be made.  
If the division point is at the start or end of a scene, a  
message will appear, but no division will be made.  
A movie scene whose recording time is 0.5 seconds  
or less cannot be divided.  
If you want to change the scene to be divided,  
you can change it on this screen.  
6
7
When you reach the  
Se l ect D i v i s i o n Po i n t  
002  
0 : 00 : 18  
point where you want  
to divide the scene,  
press the PHOTO/  
SELECT button.  
PHOTO  
ENTER  
CANCEL  
The status bar of  
The screen for verifying  
division will appear:  
Choose “YES”, and then  
press the A button.  
scene being played  
back can be switched  
off or on by pressing  
the DISPLAY button  
If free space available on HDD/DVD is insufficient,  
division will not be possible: Delete unnecessary  
scenes.  
86  
HDD  
1<  
COMBINING MULTIPLE SCENES (EDIT – COMBINE)  
If you have recorded numerous short scenes, combining them will be facilitated by the use of Disc  
Navigation.  
Be sure to select consecutive multiple scenes. When using a DVD-RAM, combining scenes is  
possible only when “Category: All” is specified (p. 110). Stills cannot be combined.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
6
The screen for verifying combination will  
appear: Choose “YES”, and then press the  
A button.  
Press the MENU button, choose “Scene”,  
“Edit”, “Combine”, and then press A  
button.  
The two images appearing on the verification  
screen are those of the first and last scenes to  
be combined.  
Choose “NO” to cancel combination.  
After Yes or No setting, the “Combine  
Scenes” screen will be restored.  
The thumbnail of the first scene will appear in  
the combined scene.  
Repeat steps 3 and 6 to combine other scenes.  
3
4
The “Combine Scenes” screen will appear:  
Point the cursor at the first scene to be  
combined, and then press the A button.  
The cursor will change to double frames of  
blue and yellow.  
Use the f/e/d/c buttons to  
determine the range of scenes to be  
combined, point the cursor at the last scene,  
and then press the A button.  
The cursor will change to a red frame. The  
last scene will be double frames of red and  
yellow.  
7
Press the C button to quit.  
Note:  
You can also select multiple scenes after step 1:  
Press the MENU button to continue the procedure of  
combination.  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the  
A button in step 3, the submenu will appear (see  
page 86).  
With fade effect, the “IN” effect of the first scene in the  
selected range and the “OUT” effect on the last scene  
will be attached to a combined scene.  
Scenes in different programs (different recording  
dates) cannot be combined: Create a play list first,  
and then combine such scenes on the play list.  
When using the HDD, scenes with different VIDEO  
Modes or 16:9 mode cannot be combined.  
5
If you do not wish to change the scenes to be  
combined, press the A button.  
To change the scenes, press the C (STOP/  
EXIT) button to return the cursor to yellow,  
and then select the scenes to be combined  
again.  
HDD  
1<  
ARRANGING ORDER OF SCENES (EDIT – MOVE)  
You can arrange scenes within a play list by moving them to desired positions (p. 103). Create a play  
list first, and then arrange the scenes [“CREATING NEW PLAY LIST (CREATE)”, p. 98].  
87  
HDD  
1<  
DIRECTING SCENES EFFECTIVELY (EFFECT – FADE)  
You can add fading to the beginning and/or end of scene.  
There are three types of special effects:  
Fade Out  
Fade Out  
Fade Out  
Fade In  
Fade In  
Fade In  
White:  
Wipe:  
B/W:  
Fades in from white screen  
Fades in from black screen  
to vertical direction of screen  
Fades out from vertical  
direction of screen to black  
screen  
Fades in from Black and  
Fades out to white screen  
White screen to color screen  
Fades out from color screen  
to Black and White screen  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
7
Press the C button to quit.  
Place the cursor on the scene to which fade is  
to be added.  
The “[” and/or “]” icon(s) will appear in  
the scenes for which fade in and/or fade out  
have been set.  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
“In” effect  
Choose, “Scene”, “Effect”, “Fade” and then  
press the A button.  
PLAY  
5
The “Fade” screen will appear: If you are sure  
you want to add the fade effect to the scene,  
press the A button.  
“Out” effect  
Note:  
If a disc on which fade has been set on scene with  
this DVD video camera/recorder is played on a DVD  
reorder/player, or the scene is captured into a PC, the  
set fade will not be reflected (see Note on page 80).  
When dubbing on a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/  
+RW, the setting on fade will not be reflected (see  
page 84).  
If you want to change the scene to which fade  
is added, you can change it on this screen.  
6
Select the special effects for “IN” and/or  
“OUT”, choose “Enter”, and then press the  
A button.  
You can use the f/e buttons to move the  
cursor to “IN”, “OUT”, “Enter” or “Cancel”.  
Use the d/c buttons to choose the effect  
to be added, and then press the A button  
to set the effect.  
To cancel setting, choose “Cancel”.  
If you choose “Enter” and press the A  
button, the “Fade” screen will be restored  
after a message appears.  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add fade to other  
scenes.  
88  
HDD  
1<  
PLAYING BACK BY SKIPPING SCENES (EFFECT – SKIP)  
You can specify “Skip” for scenes you do not want to play back: The selected scenes will be skipped.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
6
Press the C button to quit.  
Place the cursor on the scene to which skip is  
to be set.  
Multiple scenes can be selected for skipping  
(p. 79).  
A skip icon “  
” will appear in the  
thumbnail of any scene for which skipping  
has been set.  
Al l Pr o  
Skip icon  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “Scene”, “Effect”, “Skip”, and then  
press the A button.  
5
The “Set Skip” screen will appear: If you are  
sure you want to skip the selected scene,  
press the A button.  
Releasing Skip  
Perform the same procedure as setting skip: The  
skip icon will disappear and skipping of the  
scene will be released.  
If you want to change the scene to be  
skipped, you can change it on this screen.  
After skip setting, the “Set Skip” screen will  
be restored.  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the  
A button in step 5, the submenu screen will appear  
(p. 86).  
Repeat step 5 to set skipping of other scenes.  
If a disc on which skip has been set on scene with  
this DVD video camera/recorder is played on a DVD  
reorder/player, or the scene is captured into a PC, the  
set skip will not be reflected (see Note on page 80).  
When dubbing on a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/  
+RW, the setting on skip will not be reflected (see  
page 84).  
89  
HDD  
1<  
CHANGING IMAGES FOR THUMBNAILS (EFFECT – THUMBNAIL)  
Normally, the first image of the recorded scene is displayed as a thumbnail: You can choose another  
image of the scene for thumbnail. If you set a vivid image to thumbnail, you can know what you  
recorded from a glance at the Disc Navigation screen.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the  
A button in step 6, the submenu screen will appear  
(p. 86).  
Place the cursor on the scene whose  
thumbnail you wish to change.  
A thumbnail of still cannot be changed.  
Since the scene to which skipping is set cannot be  
played back, you will not be able to change its  
thumbnail: Release the skip setting of the scene to  
change the thumbnail.  
If a disc on which thumbnail has been set with this  
DVD video camera/recorder is played on a DVD  
reorder/player, or the scene is captured into a PC, the  
set thumbnail will not be reflected (see Note on  
page 80).  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “Scene”, “Effect”, “Thumbnail”, and  
then press the A button.  
5
The “Change Thumbnail” screen will appear:  
If you are sure you want to change the  
thumbnail of the selected scene, press the  
A button: The selected scene will be played  
back.  
When dubbing on a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/  
+RW, the setting on changing thumbnail will not be  
reflected (see page 84).  
If you want to change the scene whose  
thumbnail is to be changed, you can change it  
on this screen.  
6
7
When the image you want to use as the  
thumbnail of the scene appears, press the  
PHOTO/SELECT button.  
The screen for verifying switching of  
thumbnail will appear: Choose “YES”, and  
then press the A button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel switching of  
thumbnail.  
After Yes or No setting, the “Change  
Thumbnail” screen will be restored.  
Repeat steps 5 – 7 to change the other scenes.  
8
Press the C button to quit.  
90  
13  
COPYING STILLS ON DVD-RAM TO CARD (COPY)  
Set a DVD-RAM (recorded on a Hitachi DVD video camera/recorder  
marketed before DZ-HS303A/HS300A) that includes the photos you  
wish to copy, and a card with recordable space, in this DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
Before You Begin  
1
2
3
4
5
Set the power switch to “DVD“.  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Place the cursor on the scene to be copied.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
No movie can be copied.  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the  
A button in step 6, the submenu screen will appear  
(p. 86).  
See “Category” (p. 110) to check the stills recorded  
on DVD-RAM.  
You can also select multiple scenes (p. 79).  
Even if all scenes, including movies, are selected to  
be copied, only stills will be copied.  
Data on card cannot be copied to disc.  
Choose “Copy” on the “Scene” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
6
The “Copy to card” screen will appear: If you  
are sure you want to copy the selected still,  
press the A button.  
If you want to change the still to be copied,  
you can change it on this screen.  
7
The screen for verifying copy will appear:  
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel copy.  
After Yes or No setting, the “Copy to card”  
screen will be restored.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to copy other stills to  
card.  
8
Press the C button to quit.  
91  
3
LOCKING SCENES ON CARD (LOCK)  
You can lock each photo recorded on card so that it will not be deleted or edited by mistake.  
1
2
3
Set the power switch to “SD”.  
To unlock the scene  
Select the locked scene, and then use the  
procedure shown on the left to unlock the scene:  
The lock icon will disappear and locking will be  
released.  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Place the cursor on the scene to be locked.  
You can also select multiple scenes (p. 79).  
Note:  
4
5
Press the MENU button.  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the  
A button in step 6, the submenu screen will appear  
(p. 86).  
Choose “Lock” on the “Scene” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
When initializing the card, the locked scenes will also  
be deleted.  
6
The “Lock Set” screen will appear: If you are  
sure you want to lock the selected scene,  
press the A button.  
7 / 19  
Lock icon  
If you want to change the scene to be locked,  
you can change it on this screen.  
After setting, the “Lock Set” screen will be  
restored.  
Repeat step 6 to lock another scene.  
7
Press the C button to quit.  
The lock icon “T” will appear on any scene  
for which lock has been set.  
92  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
SELECTING SCENES USING MENU SCREEN (SELECT)  
You can use this “Select” function to select consecutive scenes at one time.  
This function is useful when there are numerous scenes.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
4
5
Choose “Select” on the “Scene” menu screen.  
Point the cursor at the first or last scene to be  
selected: When selecting all scenes, simply  
proceed with step 3.  
Choose “Start →  
Sc ene  
Ed  
E f  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t l  
i
f
t
S
Cu  
A
t
a
r
l
r
r
t
Cu  
r
r en t  
Current”, “Current →  
End” or “All” and then  
press the A button.  
ec  
t
en t  
End  
l
l
a
i
ENTER  
RETURN  
3
Press the MENU button.  
Deselecting selected scenes  
Deselecting scenes one by one:  
Deselecting all the selected scenes at once:  
While you are displaying the “All Programs”  
screen on which scenes have been selected, press  
the C button.  
While you are displaying the “All Programs”  
screen on which scenes have been selected, place  
the cursor on the scene to be deleted, and then  
press the PHOTO/SELECT button.  
Note:  
Up to 999 scenes can be selected.  
93  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
DISPLAYING INFORMATION USING MENU SCREEN (DETAIL)  
You can display various information for a scene: the recording mode, recording date/time and  
length, special effects and movie quality mode.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Note:  
If multiple scenes have been selected, the total  
recording time of the selected scenes (total number in  
case of stills) will appear.  
Place the cursor on the scene whose  
information you wish to know.  
(When using HDD/DVD)  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
De t a i  
V I DEO  
( XTRA) :  
( F NE) :  
( STD )  
( -  
PHOTO  
l
:
1m  
0m  
1m  
0m  
1m  
0
i
i
i
i
i
n43sec  
0sec  
n43sec  
(
(
(
(
(
2s c e n e s )  
0s c e n e s )  
2s c e n e s )  
0s c e n e s )  
0s c e n e s )  
n
I
Choose “Scene”, “Detail”, and then press the  
A button.  
*3  
:
:
:
n
n
0sec  
0sec  
-
-
)
*1  
*2  
RETURN  
The detailed information on the scene will  
appear.  
*1 Number of scenes whose quality mode is  
unknown:  
This will appear when the disc has a scene  
recorded on a device other than this DVD video  
camera/recorder, only if the disc has a scene  
whose mode is unknown.  
(When using HDD/DVD)  
De  
t
a
i
l
Sc e n e N o. 0 0 7  
IDEO (F NE )  
12 / / 2006  
V
I
1m i n13 s e c  
00 00AM  
Da t  
S k  
e
p
:
:
1
8
:
:
i
O
f
f
*2  
*1  
*2 This will not appear with HDD/DVD-RW/DVD-R/  
Fa d e  
I
N : None OUT :None  
+RW , since no still image can be recorded on it.  
PREV  
NEXT RETURN  
*3 Not displayed with a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R  
(finalized) /+RW that was recorded on another  
device.  
(When using card)  
*3  
*4  
De  
t
a
i
l
Sc e n e N o.  
7
1 00–0007 ( 640  
)
Da t  
e
:
12 /  
1
/ 2006  
8
:
00  
:
00AM  
L o c k  
:
O
f
f
(When using card)  
PREV  
NEXT  
RETURN  
De t a i  
l
Scene No.  
6
12/ 1 2006 12 : 5 0:00PM  
5
/
*1 Not displayed with DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/  
Scene No.  
7
+RW.  
12/ 1 6 / 2006  
8
: 0 0:00AM  
S c e n e s :  
RETURN  
2
*2 Not displayed with DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R  
(finalized)/+RW recorded on another device .  
*3 Will not appear if the loaded card does not  
comply with DCF.  
*4 Number of pixels on still in horizontal direction:  
This may not appear with a JPEG file that does  
not conform to this DVD video camera/recorder.  
Note:  
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) is a  
unified image file format for video cameras: Image  
files can be commonly used for all digital devices  
that conform to DCF. This DVD video camera/  
recorder complies with DCF.  
Pressing the c button will display information on  
the following scene; pressing the d button will  
display information on the preceding scene.  
5
Press the C button to quit.  
94  
Program  
WHAT IS “PROGRAM”?  
Program refers to an assembly of scenes recorded on the same date regardless of whether they are  
movie or still.  
Scene No. 1  
Scene No. 2  
Scene No. 3  
Scene No. 4  
Scene No. 5  
Scene No. 6  
9:00AM  
Movie  
11:45AM Still  
1:30PM  
Movie  
5:20PM  
8:00PM  
Movie  
10:20AM  
Still  
Still  
Program No. 1  
Recorded on December 20  
HDD  
1<>2/  
SWITCHING TO THUMBNAIL DISPLAY OF SPECIFIC DATE (SELECT)  
Since the scenes recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder are collected as “programs” for each  
recording date, selecting a program will allow you to display only the scenes on a specific date.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
Pressing the C button on the “Select Program” screen  
will restore the Disc Navigation screen.  
If a disc recorded on another device is loaded in this  
DVD video camera/recorder, the program may not be  
a collection of recordings on the same date.  
If you change the video quality or switch the wide  
mode with a +RW, multiple programs will be produced  
even if they are recorded on the same date.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Select” on the “Program” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
4
Select the program to  
be displayed, and then  
S e l e c t P r og r a  
m
A
l
l
Pr og r  
a
ms  
press the A button.  
0 1 1 2 /  
0 2 1 2 /  
0 3 1 2 /  
ENTER  
1
0
0
/
/
/
2006  
2006  
2006  
1
2
RETURN  
The Disc Navigation  
screen of the selected  
program will appear.  
03 12/ 2 0 / 2006  
001 / 008  
PLAY PHOTO SELECT  
95  
HDD  
1<>2/  
PLAYING BACK PROGRAM (PLAY)  
You can play back only the selected program.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Select the program to be played back, and  
then press the A button.  
Playback will start from the first scene of the  
selected program.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Play” on the “Program” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
Note:  
If “Repeat Play: On” is specified, the selected program  
will be repeatedly played back (PLAYING BACK  
SCENES REPEATEDLY (REPEAT PLAY), p. 110).  
HDD  
1<  
CHANGING TITLE OF PROGRAM (TITLE)  
The recording date/time has initially been attached to any program.  
You can change the recording date/time to any desired title.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
6
After entering the title,  
choose “Enter” and  
then press the A  
button.  
T I T L E  
a
t
a
Pa  
r
k
1
a
n
à
â
2
b
o
è
ê
3
c
p
ì
4
d
q
ò
ô
5
e
r
ù
û
6
f
s
á
ä
7
g
t
é
ë
8
h
u
í
9
i
v
ó
ö
0
j
w
ú
ü
SPACE  
k
x
ã
ç
l
m
z
õ
y
ñ
ß
î
ï
2
En t e r  
Cancel  
SELECT  
P H OTO  
ENTER  
DELETE  
Choose “Title” on the “Program” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
7
The screen for verifying  
the change in title will  
appear: Choose “YES”,  
and then press the A  
button.  
T I T L E  
a
n
t
i
a
h
Pa  
r
k
4
Select the program  
P r og r a  
m
T
i
t
l
e
F
i
s
t
i
t
l
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g ?  
whose title you want to  
change, and then press  
the A button.  
0 1 1 2 /  
0 2 1 2 /  
0 3 1 2 /  
1
0
0
/
/
2006  
2006  
2006  
YES  
NO  
1
2
/
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
The screen for setting a title will appear.  
Choose “NO” to cancel changing of the title.  
After Yes or No setting, the Disc Navigation  
screen of the selected program will appear.  
5
Use the f/e/d/  
Title input bar  
c buttons to select a  
letter, and then press  
T I T L E  
1 2 /  
2
0
/ 2006  
1
2
3
C
P
Ì
4
5
6
F
S
Á
Ä
7
G
T
8
H
U
Í
9
I
0
J
W
Ú
Ü
SPACE  
A
N
À
Â
B
O
È
Ê
D
Q
Ò
Ô
E
R
Ù
Û
K
X
Ã
Ç
L
Y
Ñ
M
Z
Õ
the A button: The  
selected letter will be  
entered.  
V
Ó
Ö
É
Ë
Î
Ï
1
En t e r  
Cancel  
SELECT  
P H OT
INPUT  
DELETE  
Input mode  
Repeat this procedure  
to create a title.  
Up to 20 characters can  
be input.  
Palette for selecting  
characters  
96  
Note:  
Characters available for entering  
title  
You can choose the title input mode: “capital  
letter”, “small letter” or “symbol”.  
To change the input mode in step 5, press the  
DISPLAY button, or use the PHOTO/SELECT  
button to place the cursor on the input mode,  
and then press the A button.  
If you wish to delete the letter for title, press the C  
button once: The input letter will be deleted. Holding  
down the C button will delete all letters in the TITLE  
column.  
You can also use the DELETE button on remote  
control to delete any input letters.  
Pressing the PHOTO/SELECT button on the title  
setting screen (in step 5) will change the cursor  
position from the title input bar to character select  
palette, input mode number, and then to “Cancel”. You  
can also use the f/e/d/c buttons to move  
the cursor up/down and to the left/right and change its  
position.  
To cancel the setting of title, choose “NO” on the  
screen for verifying the entered title: The screen for  
verifying cancellation of title setting will appear. To  
cancel title setting, choose “YES”.  
T I T L E  
1 2 /  
2
0
/ 2006  
T I T L E  
1 2 /  
2
0
6
f
s
á
ä
/ 2006  
1
2
3
C
P
Ì
4
5
6
F
S
Á
Ä
7
G
T
8
H
U
Í
9
I
0
J
W
Ú
Ü
SPACE  
1
a
n
à
â
2
b
o
è
ê
3
c
p
ì
4
d
q
ò
ô
5
e
r
ù
û
7
g
t
é
ë
8
h
u
í
9
i
v
ó
ö
0
j
w
ú
ü
SPACE  
A
N
À
Â
B
O
È
Ê
D
Q
Ò
Ô
E
R
Ù
Û
K
X
Ã
Ç
L
Y
Ñ
M
Z
Õ
k
x
ã
ç
l
m
z
õ
V
Ó
Ö
y
ñ
ß
É
Ë
Î
Ï
î
ï
1
En t e r  
DELETE  
Cancel  
P H OTO  
2
En t e r  
DELETE  
Cancel  
P H OTO  
SELECT  
CHNGE  
SELECT  
CHANGE  
If you press the C button on the screen for verifying  
change in title, the title setting screen will be restored.  
Double byte characters set on other devices may be  
displayed blank on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
Titles set on this DVD video camera/recorder may not  
be visible on other devices.  
Input mode  
T I T L E  
1 2 /  
2
0
6
/ 2006  
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
0
SPACE  
3
En t e r  
DELETE  
Cancel  
P H OTO  
CHANGE  
SELECT  
97  
HDD  
1<  
Play List  
WHAT IS “PLAY LIST”?  
You can create a play list on this DVD video camera/recorder by gathering your favorites from the  
recorded scenes.  
Since the play list is not created by copying data, you will consume little of the HDD/DVD capacity  
by making a play list. On the other hand, deleting scenes on play list will not increase the remaining  
HDD/DVD capacity for recording.  
Example:  
Program 1  
Program 2  
Play list 1 created  
Play list of up to No. 99 can be created, and up to 999 scenes can be included in each play list of No. 1  
to No. 99.  
HDD  
1<  
CREATING NEW PLAY LIST (CREATE)  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Note:  
Only the data on scenes is recorded on play list: If  
you create or delete play lists, the original scenes in  
programs will not be erased.  
Select the scenes to be programed in a play  
list.  
You can select multiple scenes(p. 79).  
Editing scenes on play list will not affect the scenes in  
programs.  
If the added scene had skip or fade setting, that  
information will also be added to the play list.  
You can add other scenes or remove unnecessary  
scenes to/from the create play list (see pages 100–  
102).  
The date/time when a play list was created will appear  
as the title for the play list. This title can later be  
changed (p. 104).  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the  
A button in step 5, the submenu will appear (p. 86).  
If free space available on HDD/disc is insufficient,  
creation of new play list may not be possible: Delete  
unnecessary scenes.  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Create” on the “PlayList” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
5
The “Create PlayList” screen will appear: If  
the selected scenes on the play list are the  
ones you want, press the A button.  
If you want to change any of scenes you are  
registering, you can also use this screen (see  
pages 79 and 93).  
6
When creation of a play list is complete, the  
created play list will appear on the Disc  
Navigation screen.  
98  
HDD  
1<  
SWITCHING TO DISPLAY OF EACH PLAY LIST (SELECT)  
Select the desired one of multiple play lists: The Disc Navigation screen of the selected play list will  
appear.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Use the “Select Playlist” screen to select the  
play list you wish to display, and then press  
the A button.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Select” on the “PlayList” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
The Disc Navigation screen of the selected  
play list will be displayed.  
Note:  
To display the Disc Navigation screen showing all  
programs (all recorded scenes), choose “All Programs”  
on the “Select PlayList” screen.  
Editing on play list  
Dubbing,  
p. 83  
p. 85  
p. 90  
p. 89  
p. 88  
p. 87  
p. 86  
p. 91  
Deleting scene,  
Changing thumbnail,  
Setting skip,  
When making settings on play list, such as  
changing title, setting skip, adding fade, etc., use  
the same procedure for setting on program or  
scenes. Perform these settings, referring to the  
following reference pages:  
Adding fade,  
Combining scenes,  
Dividing a scene,  
Copying to card,  
Changing title,  
Arranging order of scenes  
(only on play list)  
p. 96, 104  
p. 103  
HDD  
1<  
PLAYING BACK A PLAY LIST (PLAY)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
If “Repeat Play: On” is specified, the play list will be  
repeatedly played back (p. 110).  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Play” on the “PlayList” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
4
Use the “Start Playlist” screen to select the  
play list to be played back, and then press the  
A button.  
The selected play list will be played back  
from the first scene. To cancel playback  
midway, press the C button: The Disc  
navigation screen of the play list being played  
back will appear.  
99  
HDD  
1<  
ADDING SCENES TO PLAY LIST (EDITING PLAY LIST)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
5
Press the e button to move the cursor to the  
lower row, and press the d or c button to  
select the point where the scene is to be  
inserted.  
Use the f/e/d/  
P l a y L  
i
s
t
Sw c h  
i
t
c/A buttons to  
choose “Edit” on the  
“PlayList” menu screen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
P
l
a y  
Ed  
i
t
P
l a yL  
i
s
t
C r e a t e  
Ed  
T
D e l  
ENTER  
A
l
l
P r o g r ams  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
i
t
i
t
l
e
Scene to be added  
Insertion position  
e
t e  
RETURN  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
N
o .  
0
1
0 0 8 / 0 0 8  
0 0 8 / 0 0 8  
PHOTO SELECT  
ADD  
*1 *2  
4
Use the “Edit Playlist”  
screen to select the play  
list to which you wish  
to add scenes, and then  
press the A button.  
Ed  
i
t
P
l a y L  
1 2 /  
i
s
t
*1: Number of scene before insertion position cursor.  
*2: Number of all scenes on play list.  
01  
02  
03  
04  
1
/
2006  
2006  
2006  
2006  
12 : 30PM  
1 2 /  
1 2 /  
1 2 /  
1
2
3
0
0
0
/
/
/
8
9
3
: 00AM  
: 30AM  
:
15PM  
ENTER  
RETURN  
6
Press the f button to move the cursor to the  
upper row, and press the d or c button to  
point the cursor to the scene to be added.  
You can also select multiple scenes (p. 79).  
The scenes of the  
program that was  
displayed in step 1 will  
appear in the upper  
row, and the scenes of  
selected play list will  
appear in the lower  
row.  
Ed  
i
t
l
P
l a yL  
i
s
t
A
l
P r o g r ams  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
7
8
Press the A button to copy the scene.  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
N
o .  
0
1
ADD PHOTO SELECT  
After adding scenes is completed, the edited  
play list will appear.  
Repeat steps 5 – 7 to add other scenes.  
Press the C button: The screen for verifying  
exit will appear.  
Note:  
If you press the DISPLAY  
button, the recording date/  
time of the scene in which  
the cursor is placed on the  
operation guide will  
Ed  
i
t
l
P
l a yL  
i
s
t
Choose “Yes”, and then end editing.  
A
l
P r o g r ams  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 8 / 0 0 8  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
N
1
o .  
0
1
Note:  
1 2 / 1 / 2006  
2
:
3 0: 0 0PM  
The “ ” mark shows the position where the scene is  
to be added.  
appear. When using the  
HDD, pressing DISPLAY  
again will display the  
recording data of scene;  
pressing it once more will return to the operating  
guide. When using a disc, no recording data will  
appear.  
Recording date/time  
Pressing the C button in the middle of adding scenes  
will display the screen for verifying an exit from “Edit  
PlayList”. Choose “YES” to exit the edition of play list.  
Choosing “NO” will restore the “Edit PlayList” screen.  
If you press the MENU button in step 5 or 6, the  
submenu screen for editing play list will appear. You  
can also use this submenu to add scenes (p. 101).  
100  
HDD  
1<  
DELETING SCENES FROM PLAY LIST (EDITING PLAY LIST)  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button, and  
then press the MENU button.  
4
Press the A button.  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to delete other scenes.  
Display the editing screen of the play list to  
be edited.  
5
Press the C button: The screen for verifying  
exit will appear.  
Perform steps 3 – 4 on page 100.  
Choose “YES”, and then end editing.  
Note:  
Place the cursor on scene to be deleted, and  
then press the DELETE button on remote  
control: You can also delete the scene on the  
play list.  
3
Move the cursor to the play list in lower row,  
and place the cursor on scene to be deleted.  
You can also select multiple scenes (p. 79).  
HDD  
1<  
ADDING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST)  
You can use the menu screen to add scenes to a play list.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button, and  
then press the MENU button.  
6
Choose “Add”, and  
then press the A  
button.  
Ed  
i
t
a ms  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
Add  
Ex  
i
t
No . 0  
3
Display the editing screen of the play list to  
be edited.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Repeat steps 3 – 6 to  
add other scenes.  
Perform steps 3 – 4 on page 100.  
7
Press the C button: The  
screen for verifying exit  
will appear.  
Choose “YES”, and  
then end editing.  
Ed  
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL  
P r o g r ams  
i
s
t
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 8 / 0 0 8  
3
4
In the lower row of the play list, place the  
green “ ” mark at the position where you  
wish to insert a scene.  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
No . 03  
PHOTO SELECT  
ADD  
Place the cursor on the scene to be added  
from the upper row.  
You can also select multiple scenes (p. 79).  
Ed  
i
t
P
l a yL  
i
s
t
A
l
l
P r o g r ams  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
Scene to be added  
Insertion position  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
No . 03  
PHOTO SELECT  
ADD  
5
Press the MENU button.  
101  
HDD  
1<  
DELETING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST)  
You can delete scenes from play list on the editing screen.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button, and  
then press the MENU button.  
5
6
Choose “Delete” on the “Edit” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
Display the editing screen of the play list to  
be edited.  
Repeat steps 3 – 5 other scenes can be deleted.  
Press the C button: The screen for verifying  
exit will appear.  
Perform steps 3 – 4 on page 100.  
Choose “Yes”, and then end editing.  
3
4
Move the cursor to the play list in lower row.  
Note:  
If all scenes on play list are deleted, the play list itself  
Place the cursor on the scene to be deleted,  
and then press the MENU button.  
will also be deleted.  
You can also select multiple scenes (p. 79).  
HDD  
1<  
SELECTING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR EDITING (EDITING PLAY  
LIST)  
You can specify the range of scenes when adding or deleting consecutive multiple scenes to/from  
play list. This “Select” menu item is useful when selecting consecutive multiple scenes in items for  
adding or deleting scenes.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button, and  
then press the MENU button.  
4
5
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Start Current”, “Current End”,  
“All” on the “Select” menu screen, and then  
press the A button.  
Display the editing screen of the play list to  
be edited.  
Note:  
See page 93 for the status of scenes to be selected.  
Perform steps 3 – 4 on page 100.  
Press the C button: The screen for verifying  
exit will appear.  
Choose “Yes”, and then end editing.  
3
Specify the first or last scene of those you  
wish to select, and then press the MENU  
button.  
To select all scenes, simply press the MENU  
button.  
102  
HDD  
1<  
ARRANGING ORDER OF SCENES (MOVE)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
8
Move the “ ” mark to  
Se  
l
e c t  
I
n s e r t P o  
i
n
t
0 06 / 0 1 9  
the position where you  
wish to move the scene,  
and then press the A  
button.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Select” on the “PlayList” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
Select the play list to be edited, and then press  
the A button.  
9
The screen for verifying move will appear:  
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
4
Place the cursor on the scene to be moved.  
Choose “NO” to cancel move.  
After Yes or No setting, the scene select screen  
will be restored.  
You can also select multiple scenes (see pages  
79 and 93).  
Repeat steps 7 – 9 to move another scene.  
5
6
Press the MENU button.  
10Press the C button to quit.  
Choose “Scene”, “Edit”, “Move”, and then  
press the A button.  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the  
A button in step 7, the submenu screen will appear  
(p. 86).  
7
The “Move Scene” screen will appear: If you  
are sure you want to move the scene, press  
the A button.  
Only scenes on play list can be moved.  
When using DVD-RAM, scenes can be moved only  
when “Category: All” is specified (p. 110).  
If you want to change the scene selected in  
step 4, you can do it on this screen.  
103  
HDD  
1<  
CHANGING TITLE OF PLAY LIST (TITLE)  
The play lists have serial numbers in the order you have created them, along with the created dates/  
times: You can change this title at any time.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
5
After changing the title, the Disc Navigation  
screen on the play list whose title has been  
changed will appear.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Title” on the “PlayList” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
Note:  
The registered title can be changed at any time using  
the same procedure.  
4
Use the “Playlist Title” screen to select the  
play list whose title you wish to change, and  
then press the A button.  
See “CHANGING  
P
l a y L  
i
s
t
T i  
t
l
e
TITLE OF PROGRAM  
(TITLE)” on page 96 for  
how to enter a title.  
01  
02  
03  
04  
1 2 /  
1 2 /  
1 2 /  
1 2 /  
1
0
0
0
/
2006  
2006  
2006  
2006  
12 : 30PM  
1
2
3
/
/
/
8
9
3
: 00AM  
: 30AM  
:
15PM  
ENTER  
RETURN  
HDD  
1<  
DELETING PLAY LIST (DELETE)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
Even if you delete a play list, the original scenes  
stored on HDD/DVD will not be deleted.  
If any play list is deleted, the number of play lists will  
automatically be revised. (For example, if the No. 2  
play list is deleted, the No. 3 play list will become No.  
2 play list.)  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Delete” on the “PlayList” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
4
5
Use the “Delete Playlist” screen to select the  
play list you wish to delete, and then press  
the A button.  
The screen for verifying deletion will appear:  
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel deletion.  
After Yes or No setting, the Disc Navigation  
screen of all programs will be restored.  
104  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Go To  
From the Disc Navigation screen, you can jump to the first scene or last scene, and playback will  
start from that point.  
MOVING TO BEGINNING (END) OF HDD/DVD/CARD  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
3
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Top” or “End” on the “Go To” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
4
Press the A button to start playback.  
HDD/DVD/Card Management  
HDD  
1<>/3  
INITIALIZING HDD/DVD/CARD  
Initializing the HDD, a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/+RW or card will allow you to delete any recorded  
contents. Before using a DVD-RW/+RW on this video camera/recorder, you must format it.  
Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/  
recorder for initialization. If the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off  
during initialization and the initialization is interrupted, incorrect  
initialization will result and the incorrectly initialized disc will be  
unusable.  
Before You Begin  
If you use a brand-new DVD-RW/+RW, message “DVD is not formatted”  
will appear: Initialize the disc, following the subsequent messages  
(p. 41).  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
If you wish to delete all recorded contents, it is  
recommended that you use initialization, which will  
delete all the scenes in much less time than using the  
scene delete function.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Format HDD”, “Format DVD” or  
“Format Card” on the “HDD Setting”, “DVD  
Setting” or “Card” menu screen, and then  
press the A button.  
Initialization will delete all the recorded contents on HDD,  
disc or card: Be careful not to delete data by mistake.  
It may not be possible to initialize a disc with many  
scratches or dirt: Such a disc cannot be used (p. 10).  
This DVD video camera/recorder may not recognize  
some discs or cards that have been initialized on PC  
or a device other than this DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
If you attempt to initialize a disc or card in this DVD  
video camera/recorder when it is connected to PC via  
PC connection cable, the disc or card may not be  
initialized and may be unusable on this DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
The screen for verifying “Format HDD”,  
“Format DVD” or “Format Card” will appear.  
4
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
If you choose the VR mode when initializing a  
finalized DVD-RW (VR-mode), the finalization will not  
be released. (The DVD-RW will be a finalized disc  
without any recorded data, and recording will be  
possible on it.)  
When using DVD-RW, a screen for prompting  
you to choose the VF or VR mode will appear.  
Choose “NO” to cancel initialization.  
Choosing the VF mode will release the finalization of  
the disc.  
105  
HDD  
1<  
PROTECTION  
You can protect the HDD and a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode) in order to prevent recorded  
images from being erased or edited by mistake. Further recording will not be possible on protected  
disc until the protection is released.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
To release protection, perform steps 1-3: The screen  
for verifying the release of protection will appear.  
Choose “YES” to release the protection.  
If disc protection has been engaged on another  
device, it may not be releasable on this DVD video  
camera/recorder: Use the original device that  
protected the disc to release the protection.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Protect HDD”or “Protect DVD” on  
the “HDD setting” or “DVD Setting” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
4
The screen for verifying protection will  
appear:  
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel protection.  
After “YES” or “NO” setting, the Disc  
Navigation screen will be restored.  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
VERIFYING REMAINING FREE SPACE ON DISC OR CARD (CAPACITY)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Press the C button to quit.  
The Disc Navigation screen will be restored.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Capacity” on the “HDD Setting”,  
“DVD Setting” or “Card” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Note:  
If the HDD is protected, or a write-protected disc or  
locked card is used, the remaining space will always be  
displayed as “0”.  
(When using HDD/  
DVD)  
(When using card)  
Cap a c  
A p p r o x .  
V I DEO( XTRA) : 17  
V I DEO( F NE) : 26  
V I DEO( STD)  
Cap a c  
i
t
y
Cap a c  
A p p r o x .  
PHOTO( FINE) : 462  
PHOTO( NORM) : 924  
PHOTO( ECO) : 1848  
i
t
y
m
m
m
i
i
i
n
n
n
*1  
I
:
:
54  
i
t
y
9 0%  
Cap a c  
i
t
y
:
9 6%  
RETURN  
RETURN  
*1 With DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R: The quality  
mode first used for recording with disc will appear.  
106  
HDD  
1<  
UPDATING CONTROL INFORMATION OF HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-  
MODE) (UPDATE CONTROL INFO.)  
Disc Navigation in this DVD video camera/recorder handles information on scenes, such as  
thumbnail, skip, fade, in a particular manner. If you use another device to edit a disc recorded on this  
DVD video camera/recorder, and then use the data again with Disc Navigation in this DVD video  
camera/recorder, the Disc Navigation may not appear normally. If this happens, use the Update  
Control Info function to update the data.  
When using the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/  
recorder for updating control information, make sure that power is not  
turned off during updating. If the DVD video camera/recorder is turned  
off during updating and the updating is interrupted, the control  
information will not be updated correctly.  
Before You Begin  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Choose “YES”, and then  
press the A button.  
Upda te Con  
t
r
o
l
Infor mat ion  
Upda te Con  
YES  
t
r
o
l
I
n
for mat  
i
on?  
NO  
The message for  
proceeding will appear,  
and then the Disc Navigation menu screen  
will be restored.  
A black screen may appear while the message  
for updating is displayed.  
ENTER  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Update Control Info.” on the “HDD  
Setting” or “DVD Setting” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
The screen for verifying “Update Control  
Information” will appear.  
Choose “NO” to cancel updating.  
Note:  
It may take time to update the control information if  
the HDD/disc has many recorded scenes.  
Even if control information is updated, some discs will  
be unusable on Disc Navigation of this DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
HDD  
DELETING DATA ON HDD (FULL FORMAT)  
Executing “Format HDD” in “HDD Setting” to delete data on HDD will only change the file control  
information: It will not delete the data completely. When discarding or transferring this DVD video  
camera/recorder, be sure to delete any personal data on the HDD in order to prevent it from leaking out.  
Use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/recorder  
when completely deleting the data on the HDD: This is not possible with  
a battery.  
If power is turned off and Full Format is interrupted midway, normal  
deletion will not be possible.  
Before You Begin  
Executing Full Format will delete all data on the HDD. Save any  
important data on DVD before starting complete deletion.  
It will take approx. 30 minutes for complete deletion: In rare case, it may  
take more than one hour.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button, and  
then the MENU button.  
3
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
The HDD will be completely cleared.  
To cancel clear, choose “NO”: The Disc  
Navigation screen will be restored.  
Use the f/e/d/c buttons to choose  
“HDD Setting”, “Full Format”, and then press  
the A button: The “HDD Full Format”  
screen will appear.  
107  
<>2/  
FINALIZING DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW (FINALIZE DVD)  
Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/  
recorder when finalizing a DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW. Finalization cannot be  
executed using a battery. If the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off  
during finalization and the finalization is interrupted, incorrect  
Before You Begin  
finalization will result, and at worst, the disc may be damaged.  
If you want to play back a DVD-RW/DVD-R recorded/dubbed on this DVD video camera/  
recorder, using a device conforming to 8 cm DVD disc – such as a DVD recorder/player, etc. – you  
must finalize the disc on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
If you wish to display the DVD video menu when playing back a +RW on a DVD player or DVD  
recorder, finalize it using the Disc Navigation menu.  
No further recording/dubbing can be done on a finalized DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW. You  
can, however, unfinalize the DVD-RW (VF-mode)/+RW so that other scenes can be recorded/  
dubbed on it.  
Additional recording/dubbing is possible on a finalized DVD-RW (VR-mode): Unfinalizing is not necessary.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
Do not use any other device to finalize a disc  
recorded/dubbed on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
If the disc in the DVD video camera/recorder has  
already been finalized, you cannot choose “Finalize  
DVD”.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Finalize DVD” on the “DVD Setting”  
menu screen, and then press the A button.  
The time required to finalize disc that appears on the  
“Finalize DVD” screen is only for reference.  
The shorter the recording time on disc, the longer it  
will take to finalize it.  
The disc will be finalized.  
The second and later finalization will be faster with a  
disc which has previously been finalized.  
4
Choose “YES”, and then  
press the A button.  
F i n a l i z e DV D  
F u r t h e r r e c o r d i n g o n t h i s  
DV D w i l l b e i m p o s s i b l e .  
F i n a l i z e ? ( A p p r o x . 3 m i n . )  
YES NO  
Using FINALIZE button to finalize  
a disc  
Press the FINALIZE button during recording  
pause: The screen shown in step 4 above will  
appear. Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button: Finalizing will start.  
The message showing  
that the disc is being  
finalized will appear,  
and the disc will then be  
finalized.  
ENTER  
2
1
*
*
*1 Displayed only when  
a DVD-R is used.  
*2 Will vary depending  
on the recording  
time.  
5
When finalization is complete, the Disc  
Navigation screen of all programs will  
appear.  
FINALIZE  
U will appear on the Disc Navigation screen  
for a finalized disc.  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
ms  
001/ 015  
PLAY PHOTO SELECT  
Finalized disc  
001 / 010  
1
1
2
2
/
1
/
/
2
0
0
6
1
1
2
2
/
5
/
/
2
0
0
6
1
1
2
2
/
7
/
2
0
0
6
1
2
/
1
0
/
2
0
0
6
8
:
:
0
0
A
M
8
:
0
0
A
M
8
:
0
0
A
M
8
:
0
0
A
M
/
1
5
8
2
0
0
0
0
A
6
M
/
1
8
8
2
0
0
0
0
A
6
M
/
2
0
/
2
0
0
6
M
1
2
/
2
3
8
/
2
0
0
0
0
A
6
M
:
8
:
0
0
A
:
TOP  
PREV  
NEXT  
END  
Screen when viewed on DVD recorder/player  
(DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW)  
108  
>/  
ADDITIONALLY RECORDING ON FINALIZED DVD-RW (VF-MODE)/+RW  
(UNFINALIZE DVD)  
You can unfinalize the DVD-RW (VF-mode)/+RW finalized on this DVD video camera/recorder so  
that additional recording can be done on it.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Unfinalize DVD” on the “DVD  
Setting” menu screen, and then press the A  
button.  
The screen for verifying unfinalization will  
appear.  
4
Choose “YES”, and then press the A  
button.  
The message showing that the disc is being  
unfinalized will appear, and the disc will then  
be unfinalized.  
Note:  
A finalized DVD-RW (VR-mode) can be recorded as  
is, without being unfinalized.  
109  
Others  
1
DISPLAYING MOVIES OR STILLS INDEPENDENTLY (CATEGORY)  
If you insert a DVD-RAM that includes photos recorded on a DVD video camera/recorder other  
than DZ-HS303A/HS300A, the scenes on the disc will be displayed in the order of recording,  
regardless of whether they are movies or stills.  
Scenes recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder will be displayed in the order of recording  
regardless of whether they are movies or stills. You can use the Disc Navigation screen to switch this  
display to stills only or movies only.  
DZ-HS303A/HS300A cannot record any photos on a HDD/DVD.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Specify the desired  
option for display, and  
then press the A  
button.  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
m
s
006 / 015  
PLAY PHOTO SELECT  
Use the f/e/d/  
O t h e r s  
(When “PHOTO” is  
specified)  
C a t e g o r y  
c/A buttons to  
R e p e a t P l a y  
A l  
V I DEO  
PHOTO  
l
T V Ty p e  
choose “Category” on  
the “Others” menu  
ENTER  
RETURN  
screen, and then press  
the A button.  
All:  
To display all scenes, movies or stills,  
in the order of recording.  
VIDEO: To display only movies in the order of  
recording.  
PHOTO: To display only photos in the order of  
recording.  
When the Disc Navigation screen is finished,  
“Category: All” will be restored.  
HDD  
1<>2/  
PLAYING BACK SCENES REPEATEDLY (REPEAT PLAY)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
If the range for playback has been specified:  
Playback of the scenes in that range will repeat.  
See pages 79 and 93 when selecting multiple  
scenes.  
Use the f/e/d/  
c/A buttons to  
O t h e r s  
R e p e a t P l a y  
T V Ty p e  
On  
To release Repeat Play  
O
f
f
choose “Repeat Play”  
on the “Others” menu  
Use one of the following 3 methods to release:  
Choose “Off” in step 4 on the left.  
Turn the DVD video camera/recorder off  
once.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
screen, and then press  
the A button.  
Press the DISC EJECT button to remove the  
disc.  
4
Choose “On”, and then press the A button:  
Playback will start.  
Note:  
Choose “Off” to cancel Repeat Play setting.  
Press the C button to terminate playback. However,  
the Repeat Play setting will not be canceled.  
Repeat playback will not function when playback is  
instructed from the recording pause status.  
When Repeat Play is set  
If one scene has been specified: When playback  
of the last scene is finished, playback of all  
scenes will repeat from the first scene.  
110  
HDD  
1<>2/  
PLAYING BACK WIDE-MODE IMAGES ON 4:3 DISPLAY TV (TV TYPE)  
If you connect the DVD video camera/recorder with a disc recorded in wide mode to a TV with 4:3  
display only and play it back, vertically long images will appear. You can specify “TV type: 4:3” to  
display 4:3 images on the TV.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Choose “4:3”, and then press the A button.  
O t h e r s  
R e p e a t P l a y  
T V Ty p e  
16:9  
4:3  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “TV type” on the “Others” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3
SLIDE SHOW (CONTINUOUS PLAYBACK OF STILLS)  
If you play back stills recorded on a card, the DVD video camera/recorder will enter the playback  
pause status after each still is played back.  
Setting Slide Show allows you to continuously play back stills.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
With slide show, playback will start from the first photo  
on card regardless of the position of cursor or  
whether you attempt to select scenes.  
If you press the C button or turn the DVD video  
camera/recorder off, Slide Show will be canceled.  
Use the f/e/d/c/A buttons to  
choose “Slide Show”, “Start”, and then press  
the A button.  
Start: To start a slide show.  
When playback is finished, the DVD video  
camera/recorder will enter the playback  
pause status at the final still.  
Pressing the C button will restore the Disc  
Navigation screen.  
111  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Viewing on TV Screen  
Connecting to  
a
TV  
CONNECTING TO A TV  
Use the provided AV/S input/output cable to connect the DVD video camera/recorder to a TV as  
follows:  
To S-VIDEO  
input jack*  
To video/audio  
input jacks  
To AV input/output jack  
Red  
AV/S input/output cable  
(provided)  
White  
Yellow  
* If your TV has an S-VIDEO input jack, you can connect the S-VIDEO plug to it.  
Note:  
Using S-VIDEO will deliver clearer playback status.  
Before connecting, make sure that the volume on TV  
is turned down: Forgetting this may cause howling  
from the TV speakers.  
Insert the AV/S input/output cable plugs into jacks  
straight: Obliquely inserting them could damage the  
jacks.  
Stereo Type with  
S-VIDEO Jack  
Stereo Type  
Monaural Type  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO VIDEO  
L
AUDIO VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
R
R
White  
Yellow  
Red  
Yellow  
Red  
White  
White  
112  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
VIEWING ON TV SCREEN  
1
Turn the TV on and set the input selector to  
“VCR” whichever applicable Video input.  
Note:  
Adjust the volume of sound on TV.  
The infrared remote control is useful when operating  
the DVD video camera/recorder while viewing an  
image on TV screen. However, if you use a Hitachi  
VCR, the remote control may inadvertently operate  
the VCR if it is near the DVD video camera/recorder.  
To prevent this, set the remote control code of the  
VCR to a position other than “VCR2”.  
Refer to the TV instruction manual for how to  
switch the TV input.  
2
Turn the DVD video camera/recorder on.  
Information during recording and playback will appear  
on the TV screen: You can also switch off the display  
during recording. Refer to “SETTING ON-SCREEN  
DISPLAY OUTPUT ON OR OFF (OSD OUTPUT)” on  
page 69.  
The image that the DVD video camera/  
recorder is seeing will appear on the TV  
screen.  
You can also monitor the image on the LCD  
screen or viewfinder of the DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
When copy-guarded disc is played back, no image will  
appear on TV screen.  
If you use TV with wide mode (aspect ratio 16:9) and  
set the TV to the wide mode, the entire Disc  
Navigation display may not be displayed on the TV  
screen. If this happens, release the wide mode setting  
on TV (see the TV instruction manual for releasing the  
wide mode).  
3
Perform playback, recording or editing.  
You can perform playback, editing or editing  
on Disc Navigation while checking on TV  
screen.  
113  
1<>2/  
Playback on DVD Recorder/Player  
PLAYING BACK DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-MODE)  
You can use a DVD recorder or DVD player that conforms to DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode) to play  
back 8 cm DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode) recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
1
Insert the disc into the DVD recorder/player  
and play it back.  
Note:  
When playing back disc on another device, the Disc  
Navigation display will be different from the one on  
this DVD video camera/recorder.  
See the instruction manual for DVD  
recorder/player.  
Finalizing DVD-RW (VR-mode) may be necessary.  
Do not insert a DVD-RW (VR-mode) that was  
recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder into a  
device that does not conform to 8cm DVD-RW (VR-  
mode): Doing so may make the disc unusable.  
DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode) recorded on this DVD  
video camera/recorder can be played back on other  
DVD recorder/players or other devices conforming to  
8 cm DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode), but playback  
on all DVD recorder/players is not guaranteed.  
PLAYING BACK DVD-RW (VF-MODE)/DVD-R/+RW  
1
Finalize a recorded DVD-RW (VF-mode)/  
DVD-R/+RW.  
Note:  
Do not insert a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R that has  
not been finalized into any DVD recorder: The disc  
may be unusable.  
You need to finalize a disc to play it back on  
DVD recorder/player: See page 108.  
No further data can be recorded on finalized  
disc.  
Do not insert a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW  
recorded on another DVD recorder and not finalized,  
in this DVD video camera/recorder: Doing so will  
make the disc unusable.  
A recorded +RW is automatically finalized when it is  
removed from the DVD video camera/recorder even if  
you do not use the Disc Navigation function to finalize  
it (p. 108) (auto-finalize). An auto-finalized +RW can  
be played back on a DVD recorder/player, etc., but no  
DVD video menu will appear. To display the DVD  
video menu on a DVD recorder/player, etc., finalize  
the +RW using the Disc Navigation function before  
playing it back on a DVD recorder/player, etc.  
A +RW with a shorter recording time may not be  
playable on a DVD recorder/player, etc. if it has been  
auto-finalized. In this case, use the Disc Navigation  
function to finalize the +RW.  
Note:  
Use this DVD video camera/recorder to finalize the  
DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW recorded on the DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
2
Insert the disc into the DVD recorder/player  
and play it back.  
See the instruction manual for DVD  
recorder/player.  
DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW recorded on this  
DVD video camera/recorder can be played back on  
other DVD recorder/players or other devices  
conforming to 8 cm DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW,  
but playback on all DVD recorder/players is not  
guaranteed.  
Playback may not be possible on some DVD recorder/  
players, or it may depend on the recorded status of  
DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW: In such cases,  
play back the DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW on  
this DVD video camera/recorder. Also, playback on  
DVD recorder/players may stop momentarily between  
scenes.  
114  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Recording (Dubbing) Images  
Before connecting this DVD video camera/recorder to another device,  
be sure to turn both devices off.  
Insert a recordable disc* or card* into this DVD video camera/recorder  
1
2
(see pages 26 and 27).  
No photo can be recorded.  
1
*
*2 Only photos can be recorded: No video can be recorded.  
If you operate the DVD video camera/recorder connected to another  
device, always power the camera/recorder from AC outlet using the AC  
adapter/charger.  
Before You Begin  
If you use a Hitachi VCR, it will be operated by the remote control*  
provided with the DVD video camera/recorder. When recording an  
image from a Hitachi VCR, change the remote control code of the VCR  
to other than “VCR2”.  
* The remote control is not provided with DZ-HS300A.  
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES FROM OTHER VIDEO DEVICE (for DZ-  
HS303A only)  
You can record (dub) images from other video devices to disc or card in this DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
Use the AV/S input/output cable (provided) to connect the DVD video camera/recorder to the  
other video device as follows:  
Signal flow  
To S-VIDEO  
output jack of  
VCR, etc.*  
To video/audio  
output jacks  
To AV input/output jack  
Red  
AV/S input/output cable  
(provided)  
White  
Yellow  
* If the connected AV device has an S-VIDEO output jack, you can connect  
the S-VIDEO jack of AV/S input/output cable.  
115  
1
Set the input source on  
the DVD video camera/  
recorder to “LINE (L  
IN)”.  
Note:  
L
IN  
Reduce the volume of external input sound heard  
from the built-in speaker: The loud volume may cause  
noise to enter the recorded image.  
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3  
0
MIN  
The recorded contents can be played back in the  
same manner as when playing back camera images  
recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
The “Input Source” setting will return to “CAMERA”  
whenever DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.  
Recording of most images is prohibited by the copy-  
guard signal to protect the copyright, except for  
images recorded on camcorders for personal  
enjoyment. “COPY PROTECTED” appears in these  
images: They cannot be recorded on this DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
Typical copyright protected images include those of  
DVD video, LD, recorded video tapes, some parts of  
digital satellite broadcasts, etc.  
If a video signal that cannot be read by this DVD  
video camera/recorder is present – even in images  
recorded on camcorder for personal enjoyment  
without copy-guard signal – the input image may not  
be recorded normally.  
8
1
:
/
0
0
0
AM  
FINE  
1
2
/
2
0
6
Switch the input  
referring to “Input  
Source” on (p. 67).  
Choose “S LINE” to input S-VIDEO signal.  
2
3
Turn on the connected device, and start  
playback.  
The picture will appear on the LCD screen or  
viewfinder of this DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
Press the REC button.  
Recording will start on this DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
The operation of this line-input recording is  
the same as for recording movie.  
Press the PHOTO/SELECT button when  
recording a photo.  
If the input signal is interrupted by switching the  
channel on TV or switching the signal using video  
selector, normal recording cannot be performed.  
No “copy-once” image can be recorded on this DVD  
video camera/recorder even if a disc conforming to  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is  
used.  
When recorded images are played back on PC, black  
bands may appear at the top/bottom and on the left  
and right of screen.  
116  
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES ON OTHER VIDEO DEVICES  
You can record (dub) images played back on this DVD video camera/recorder, on other video  
devices.  
Use the AV/S input/output cable (provided) to connect the DVD video camera/recorder to another  
video device as shown in the following figure:  
Signal flow  
To S-VIDEO  
input jack of  
VCR, etc.*  
To video/audio  
input jacks  
To AV input/output jack  
Red  
White  
Yellow  
AV/S input/output cable  
(provided)  
* If the video device to be connected has an S-VIDEO input jack, you can connect it to the DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select a scene to be played back.  
Note:  
Using S-VIDEO will enable you to record clearer  
images.  
Reduce the volume of external input sound heard  
from the built-in speaker: The loud volume may cause  
noise to enter the recorded image.  
It is recommended that you use Disc Navigation to  
create a play list including the scenes to be dubbed  
among the scenes recorded on this DVD video  
camera/recorder (p. 98).  
Set the channel of the connected video device  
to an external input.  
4
Press the playback (A) button on this DVD  
video camera/recorder and the record button  
on connected device: The DVD video  
camera/recorder will start playback and the  
recorded device will record (dub) it.  
117  
HDD  
1<>2/3  
Connecting to PC  
Connecting to PC  
Software Provided  
You can utilize on PC the videos and photos recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder, using the  
PC connection cable and software CD-ROM provided, or generally available software.  
The provided CD-ROM contains the following software for Windows and Macintosh:  
Windows  
ImageMixer 3  
This allows you to import the images recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder into PC.  
You can cut-edit imported images, add titles and BGM, and edit videos, i.e., attach image  
switching effect.  
You can also create a DVD-Video (DVD-RW/DVD-R) and DVD-VR (DVD-RAM/DVD-RW) by  
importing the images recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder into PC.  
Macintosh  
Pixe VRF Browser EX  
This allows you to import the images recorded on DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R loaded in the  
DVD video camera/recorder into Macintosh as an MPEG file.  
When importing an image, you can designate the import range.  
ImageMixer VCD/DVD2  
You can create a DVD-Video (DVD-RW/DVD-R) from the images imported into Macintosh  
using Pixe VRF Browser EX.  
The following are available on the provided software:  
OS  
HDD  
Disc  
Card  
Read  
Write  
Read  
Write  
Windows  
*
*
Macintosh  
*
* Incompatible with a +RW  
Note:  
The software for Macintosh provided with this DVD video camera/recorder is not compatible with a +RW.  
Finalize the DVD-RW/DVD-R recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder before using it on PC.  
You cannot create a DVD-VR (DVD-RAM/DVD-RW) on the Macintosh software.  
Since the audio format of the MPEG file imported into Macintosh using Pixe VRF Browser EX is AC3 audio, no  
audio will be played back even on QuickTime MPEG-2 playback component and only video is played back.  
The software provided with this DVD video camera/recorder cannot handle copyright-protected DVDs, such as  
CPRM and CSS.  
The provided software can handle Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, Italian and Chinese  
(simplified).  
For explanation, this manual uses Windows XP screens for Windows and Mac OS X 10.4 screens for  
Macintosh.  
118  
Before unpacking the provided software CD-ROM, read the License Agreement on page 161.  
Requirements of available PC  
[When using Windows]  
®
OS: Windows 2000 Professional SP3 or higher, XP Home Edition/XP Professional  
®
®
*The provided software cannot be used on Windows 98 or Windows Me.  
Computer: IBM PC/AT compatible  
CPU: Intel Pentium III 800 MHz or higher (Pentium 4, 1.7 GHz or higher is recommended)  
®
®
®
*Operation is not guaranteed when the CPU is overclocked or dual CPU is used, or with a  
®
®
®
Pentium compatible CPU other than those made by Intel and AMD .  
Memory: Windows 2000: At least 128 MB (256 MB or more is recommended)  
Windows XP: At least 256 MB (512 MB or more is recommended)  
Free space on hard disk: At least 300 MB (needed to install the application)  
When creating a disc or disc images, free space three times that of disc  
to be created will be required.  
Display that can show with at least 1024 × 768 pixels and 16 bits (High color)  
®
Graphics accelerator with VRAM of at least 4 MB, compatible with DirectX 9.0c or higher  
USB: At least one unused port is necessary for this product (USB2.0 is recommended)  
[When using Macintosh]  
OS:  
Mac OS X (10.2.8, 10.3.4-10.3.9, 10.4.1-10.4.7)  
* The provided software cannot be used on Mac OS X Server.  
iMac G4, iMac G5, iBook G4, PowerBook G4, PowerMac G5, eMac series, Mac mini  
series or higher that is equipped with a USB2.0 port in standard  
* Incompatible with Intel Mac.  
CPU:  
Memory: At least 256 MB (512 MB or more is recommended)  
HDD:  
Free space needed for installation: Approx. 200 MB  
Free space of at least 1 GB is needed on startup disc during running of application.  
When creating a disc or disc images, free space three times that of disc to be created will  
be required.  
At least 1024 × 768 pixels, at least 32,000 colors (full-color is recommended)  
Environment where QuickTime 6 or higher can operate  
The slot-in type drive of Macintosh is not compatible with an 8 cm disc: Be sure not to use the  
drive, since a disc inserted by mistake cannot be removed.  
Note:  
You must have the administrator authority of the PC before installing software.  
Operation is not guaranteed in the following cases:  
- When connected via USB hub  
- Multiprocessor is not supported  
- When used on your custom-made PC  
Even when your PC satisfies the above conditions of available PC, malfunction may result or restriction in use  
may occur, depending on the combination of other software in PC or peripheral devices.  
Operation is not guaranteed on all PCs that satisfy the above recommended environment.  
119  
Installing Software  
[When using Windows]  
1
Turn the PC on.  
If you have been using the PC, terminate all  
running software programs.  
5
Checking license agreement:  
Carefully read the license agreement: If you  
accept the contents, choose “I accept the  
terms of the license agreement”, and then  
click “Next”.  
2
Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-  
ROM drive of PC.  
The installer will automatically start, and the  
“Choose Setup Language” screen will  
automatically appear.  
If the “Choose Setup Language” screen does  
not appear, use Windows My Computer or  
Explorer to open the drive in which the CD-  
ROM is located, and then double-click the  
setup.exe icon in it. (Extension “exe” may not  
appear depending on the PC used.)  
3
Choose the language to be installed.  
Choose the language used with  
ImageMixer 3, and then click “Next”.  
Click  
6
Choosing the installation destination:  
If you do not wish to change the folder in  
which the software is installed, click “Next”.  
If you wish to change the folder, click  
“Change”, designate the installation location,  
and then click “Next”.  
Click  
4
The “ImageMixer 3” installation screen will  
appear: Click “Next”.  
Click  
Click  
120  
7
Choosing video system:  
The screen for setting the video system will  
appear, and then click “Next”.  
9
After installation is finished, the screen for  
prompting restart will appear: Click “Finish”  
to restart the PC.  
After restart, remove the CD-ROM from the  
PC.  
Installing the software is now complete.  
Click  
8
Executing installation:  
The setups for installation are now complete.  
Click “Install” to execute installation.  
Click  
Note:  
After installation is finished, the installation of Direct X  
may start depending on the PC used: In this case,  
follow the instructions on screen to install Direct X.  
Click  
Important information for customers who use  
Easy CD Creator 5 made by Roxio  
Corporation:  
If ImageMixer 3 provided with this DVD  
video camera/recorder is installed, Easy CD  
Creator 5 may not operate normally. The  
screen shown below will appear after you  
click “Install”:  
If you are using Easy CD Creator 5, click  
“Yes”, and do not install ImageMixer 3.  
When using ImageMixer 3, uninstall Easy CD  
Creator 5, and then install ImageMixer 3.  
121  
[When using Macintosh]  
1
Turn the Macintosh on, and insert the  
provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of  
Macintosh.  
5
6
Choosing the installation destination and  
type of installation:  
Follow the instructions on screen for  
operation: Installation will start.  
2
3
Double-click the DVDCAM3HS icon  
displayed on desktop.  
After installation is finished, the screen for  
exit will appear: Click “Close”.  
The screen for installation will close and  
installation will be complete: Remove the  
CD-ROM.  
Double-click the icon of “ImageMixer for  
DVDCAM.pkg” displayed on screen.  
The installer will start: Click “Continue”.  
4
Checking license agreement:  
The license agreement screen will appear.  
Set the language to be used when installing  
the software, and then carefully read the  
license agreement: If you agree with the  
contents, choose “Continue”. If you accept  
the license agreement, click “I agree”.  
* With the provided software for Macintosh, the  
language used with OS will automatically be  
installed.  
Setting language  
when installing  
Click  
122  
Connecting to PC via PC Connection Cable  
Use the provided PC connection cable to connect the DVD video camera/recorder to PC as shown  
below.  
To USB connection  
terminal  
To PC connection  
terminal  
PC connection cable (provided)  
Note:  
The PC connection cable does not supply power to the DVD video camera/recorder: Use the AC adapter/charger  
to power the DVD video camera/recorder.  
Before connecting the DVD video camera/recorder to PC, disconnect any cables or camera accessories (external  
video flash, external microphone, etc.) other than the PC connection cable and AC adapter/charger.  
When connecting the DVD video camera/recorder to PC, the ACCESS/PC indicator will light green. While HDD or  
a disc is being accessed, the indicator will light or blink orange. While an SD memory card is being accessed, the  
CARD ACCESS indicator will light or blink red.  
When this DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC, nothing will appear on the LCD monitor or in the  
viewfinder.  
When using Windows, the DVD video camera/recorder can be connected to a USB1.1 port of PC. However, since  
the data transfer speed is lower than when connecting to a USB2.0 port, lost frames may occur or the process  
may take more time.  
Read “Cautions when connecting DVD video camera/recorder to PC” on page 137.  
The power switch of this DVD video camera/recorder has three modes: HDD mode when it is set to  
“HDD”, Disc mode when it is set to “DVD”, and Card mode when it is set to “SD”.  
* The mode cannot be switched while the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC. To  
switch, unplug the PC connection cable from the PC (see page 126), and then change over the  
power switch.  
If you connect the DVD video camera/recorder to PC via PC connection cable, the PC will  
automatically recognize the DVD video camera/recorder. After recognition is finished, it may be  
prompted to restart the PC: In this case, follow the instruction and restart the PC.  
123  
When connecting the DVD video camera/recorder to PC, the DVD video camera/recorder will be  
recognized as a drive. The drive will appear on screen as follows:  
[When using Windows]  
If the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC with its power switch set to “HDD” or  
“DVD”, it will be recognized as an optical disc drive, and a disc set in the DVD video camera/  
recorder can be accessed. (The shape of icon and drive name, such as G:, will depend on the software  
environment used.)  
If the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC with its power switch set to “SD”, it will be  
recognized as a removal disk, and a card set in the DVD video camera/recorder can be accessed.  
(The drive name, such as G:, will depend on the software environment used.)  
[When using Macintosh]  
If the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to Macintosh USB  
port with the power switch set to “HDD” or “DVD”, it will be  
recognized as a removable drive, and the icon shown on the right  
will appear. (The shape of icon and drive name will depend on the  
software environment used.)  
If the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to Macintosh USB port with the  
power switch set to “SD”, it will be recognized as a removable drive, and the  
icon shown on the right will appear.  
Double-click this icon: The contents of card can be checked.  
(The shape of icon and drive name will depend on the software environment used.)  
Handling photos  
Photos are recorded on a SD memory card in this DVD video camera/recorder in JPEG format: Use  
the application that conforms to the JPEG images.  
The following shows how to import photos into PC/Macintosh:  
Insert an SD memory card with photos recorded into the DVD video camera/recorder, and connect it  
to PC/Macintosh. Double-click the removable disc icon displayed on the screen: The contents on the  
card will appear.  
The photos recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder are stored in “DCIM” - “100*HPNX1”  
folder on card: Drag and drop them to PC to import them.  
* The number may be different if the card was recorded on another DCF conforming device.  
The following operations are not possible on the DVD video camera/  
recorder while it is being connected to PC:  
Camera operation using operation buttons on DVD video camera/recorder.  
Ejection of disc using DISC EJECT button on DVD video camera/recorder.  
Power off using power switch.  
Do not use Explorer to operate any video files recorded on disc: Use the provided software.  
HDD, disc and card cannot simultaneously be accessed.  
A disc/card loaded in the DVD video camera/recorder can be ejected by operating  
the PC.  
The disc and SD memory card can be replaced even though the DVD video camera/recorder is  
turned off or it is not connected.  
124  
When removing disc  
[When using Windows]  
Use Windows Explorer or My Computer to choose the drive icon of DVD video camera/recorder.  
Right-click the mouse.  
Choose “Eject”.  
The cover of disc insertion block on DVD video camera/recorder will open.  
Insert another disc and close the cover: The disc will be recognized.  
[When using Macintosh]  
Place the drive icon of this DVD video camera/recorder (displayed on desktop) in Trash Box: The  
cover of disc insertion block on DVD video camera/recorder will open. Load another disc and  
close the cover: The disc will be recognized.  
When removing SD memory card  
[When using Windows]  
Make sure that the SD memory card is not being accessed by the PC software on PC, and that the  
CARD ACCESS indicator on DVD video camera/recorder (see page 8) is not lit or blinking, and then  
remove the SD memory card from DVD video camera/recorder.  
The CARD ACCESS indicator may be lit or blinking for a while after a file in PC is written to the SD  
memory card: Wait until the CARD ACCESS indicator goes out. It will sometimes take no less than a  
few minutes.  
[When using Macintosh]  
Drag the removal drive icon (displayed on desktop) and place it in Trash Box. After making sure that  
the icon disappears from desktop, remove the SD memory card from the card insertion slot of this  
DVD video camera/recorder.  
USING DISC IN DVD DRIVE BUILT INTO PC  
If you have a PC with the drive conforming to the disc used, and the application software, you can  
directly insert the disc into the drive to use it.  
Whether a disc conforms to the DVD drive will depend on the DVD drive: Use a DVD drive that  
conforms to each disc.  
Finalized DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW can be used with DVD-ROM drive (reading only).  
The slot-in type drive of Macintosh is not compatible with an 8 cm disc: Be sure not to use the  
drive, since a disc inserted by mistake cannot be removed.  
Note:  
When writing images edited on PC to a brand-new DVD-RW, do not format the disc on DVD video camera/recorder.  
Some vertically installed and slot-in type drives on PC cannot accept an 8 cm disc.  
An adapter that converts 8 cm CD to 12 cm diameter (for 8 cm CD) cannot be used for any 8 cm DVD-RAM/8 cm  
DVD-RW/8 cm DVD-R/8 cm +RW.  
If you use, on PC, a DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder, finalize it on the DVD  
video camera/recorder (see page 108).  
Some DVD-ROM drives cannot read a DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder.  
125  
BEFORE TERMINATING PC CONNECTION (UNPLUGGING PC  
CONNECTION CABLE)/CHANGING OVER POWER SWITCH  
[When using Windows]  
2
Choose “USB mass storage device”. The drive  
name (E:, etc.) will depend on the PC used.  
1
Before unplugging the PC connection cable  
from PC, terminate the application and then  
click the “Hardware Removal” icon on task  
tray at the bottom right of Windows screen.  
3
A message showing that “hardware removal”  
is possible will appear.  
Unplug the PC connection cable.  
* If “hardware removal” results in error, terminate  
Windows® once, and then unplug the PC  
connection cable. When using Windows® 2000  
Professional, installing Windows® 2000 SP3 or  
later may resolve the problem. Ask your PC  
manufacturer or Microsoft Corporation how to  
get Windows® 2000 SP3.  
Click  
[When using Macintosh]  
When removing the DVD video camera/recorder from PC, choose the drive icon of DVD video  
camera/recorder (HDD, disc or card), and choose “Eject” in the “File” menu.  
126  
Using Software  
See page 132 when using Macintosh.  
[When using Windows]  
USING IMAGEMIXER 3  
ImageMixer 3 allows you to capture the images recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder into  
PC, edit the video file, and create a DVD-Video or DVD-VR using the video file.  
The following shows the basic operation of ImageMixer 3.  
Refer to the electronic instruction manual that can be read on PC for detailed instructions about  
ImageMixer 3: While ImageMixer 3 is being activated, click “Help” - “ImageMixer Help (F1)” to  
display this manual. See the electronic instruction manual for explanation on how to edit video files.  
To start ImageMixer 3, double-click the ImageMixer 3 shortcut that was created when it was  
installed.  
* If there is no ImageMixer 3 shortcut on desktop, choose [Start] - [Programs] or [All programs] -  
[PIXELA] - [ImageMixer 3] - [ImageMixer 3].  
VIEWING IMAGES RECORDED ON HDD/DISC USING PC  
* A DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder must be finalised on this  
DVD video camera/recorder (see page 108).  
1
Connect this DVD video camera/recorder to  
the USB port of PC.  
3
4
Click “Edit new video”.  
To view images recorded on a disc, first insert  
the disc you wish to play back into the DVD  
video camera/recorder, and then connect the  
DVD video camera/recorder to the USB port  
of PC.  
The project setting screen will appear: Click  
“OK”.  
2
Start ImageMixer 3.  
When ImageMixer 3 starts up, the launcher  
shown below will appear: Click “Edit Video”.  
Click  
It is not necessary change any setting when  
using PC to view the images recorded on  
HDD/disc.  
Click  
127  
5
The screen for choosing the device to be  
imported will appear: Choose “Hitachi  
DVDCAM (HDD)” when the power switch is  
set to “HDD”, “Hitachi DVDCAM” when it is  
set to “DVD”, and then click “Import”.  
If you wish to change the import device, and  
continue import, unplug the PC connection  
cable from the PC, and then change over the  
power switch (see page 123).  
Note:  
When connecting the DVD video camera/recorder to a  
USB1.1 port of PC, the data transfer speed will be  
insufficient, which could result in lost frames.  
When the power switch is set to "DVD":  
Click  
6
Use the ImageMixer 3 Video Editor screen to  
select a title/chapter you wish to play back,  
and then click “Preview”.  
The image recorded on HDD or disc will  
appear. Select the title/chapter to be played  
back, and then click “Preview”: Playback will  
start.  
Click the full-screen display button: A full-  
screen image will appear. To exit the full-  
screen display, double-click the screen.  
Click “Eject” button to play back the images  
on another disc. The cover of disc insertion  
block on DVD video camera/recorder will  
open: Remove the disc, and load another disc.  
Eject button  
Full-screen  
Click  
display button  
128  
CREATING DVD-VIDEO USING IMAGES RECORDED ON HDD/DISC  
You can use the images recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder to create a disc that can be  
viewed on DVD recorders/players.  
* A DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder must be finalized on this  
DVD video camera/recorder (see page 108).  
If the file system of HDD in your PC is FAT32, no video file larger than 4 GB can be imported, due to  
restrictions of file system.  
When using a large video file, handle it on an NTFS format HDD.  
1
Connect this DVD video camera/recorder to  
the USB port of PC.  
To save images recorded on a disc, first insert  
the disc you wish to save into the DVD video  
camera/recorder, and then connect the DVD  
video camera/recorder to the USB port of PC.  
4
Setting up project  
Set up a project. You can set up the  
designated save location of edited contents  
and image quality.  
Be sure to choose “NTSC” for the video  
system.  
This DVD video camera/recorder uses Dolby  
Digital for the audio recording format:  
Choose “Dolby Digital” for audio setting.  
After setting up the project, click the “OK”  
button.  
2
Start ImageMixer 3.  
When ImageMixer 3 starts up, the launcher  
shown below will appear: Click “Author  
DVD-Video”.  
Click  
Click  
3
Click “Create New DVD”.  
129  
5
On the “Importing Device” screen, choose  
“Hitachi DVDCAM (HDD)” when the power  
switch is set to “HDD”; and “Hitachi  
DVDCAM” when the power switch is set to  
“DVD”.  
If you wish to change the import device, and  
continue import, unplug the PC connection  
cable from the PC, and then change over the  
power switch (see page 123).  
6
Select the images from which you wish to  
create a DVD-Video, and then click “Import”.  
The image recorded on HDD, disc will  
appear. Select the chapter to be imported into  
PC, and then click “Import”: Importing into  
PC will start.  
Eject button  
Click  
Click  
If you wish to import images on another disc  
after importing images on one disc, click the  
“Eject” button. The disc insertion block of  
DVD video camera/recorder will open:  
Remove the disc, insert the other disc whose  
recorded images you wish to import into the  
DVD video camera/recorder, and then close  
the disc insertion block. After a short while,  
the images on the disc will appear: Perform  
the same procedure to import the images.  
When the images on DVD-RW (VF-mode)/  
DVD-R/+RW are imported, the recording  
date/time will not appear.  
Note:  
To import all chapters in the title at once, click “Select  
all” in the editing menu at the top of screen, and then  
click “Import”.  
To import multiple chapters, click the desired chapters  
while holding down the Ctrl key.  
130  
7
Click “Authoring” and create a DVD-Video  
menu.  
Click the “Write” button: The screen for  
setting write will appear. After checking the  
settings, click “OK”: Writing will start.  
Clicking “Authoring” will display the editing  
screen of DVD-Video menu. The video file  
previously imported into PC will appear in  
“Source”. Choose the desired video file, and click  
“Add titles”: The video file will be registered.  
When using a video file imported into PC  
using ImageMixer 3, click “File” to choose the  
folder in which the video file will be stored.  
When write is complete, the drive will open  
to eject the DVD: Creation of an original DVD  
is now finished.  
Note:  
If you load a written DVD-RW in the write drive, the  
dialog “Are you sure you want to delete the content of  
disc?” will appear.  
Deleting the content of disc will erase all data on the  
disc: Carefully check the contents of disc.  
Choosing “Yes” will display the screen for choosing  
the disc erasure method: After checking it, click the  
“OK” button. Once the contents on disc have been  
deleted, the cover of disc insertion block on DVD  
video camera/recorder will open. Close the cover  
following the message instruction.  
If the disc contains a video file that does not conform  
to DVD-Video format, the video will be re-encoded,  
resulting in deterioration of image quality.  
If you execute “File” - “Save project”, the halfway  
operation status can be saved as a project file.  
Reading in this saved project file will allow you to  
restart the operation from the saved status.  
A project file will be saved in the project folder that  
was set in step 4 on page 129, and the file name will  
be automatically attached.  
Click  
Clicking “Theme” or “Set title menu” will  
allow you to change the design of DVD-Video  
menu.  
If a video recorded on the HDD in this DVD video  
camera/recorder for extended hours is too long for  
one disc, cut-edit the video so that it can be recorded  
on one disc. See the on-line instruction manual of  
ImageMixer 3 for cut-editing of videos. To display the  
ImageMixer 3 manual, choose "Help", and then  
"Image Mixer Help (F1)", while ImageMixer 3 is being  
executed.  
Choose the type of disc to be created (8 cm/  
12 cm/2-layer) using [Set] - [Configuration].  
8
Click “Write” to create a DVD-Video.  
Clicking “Write” will display the screen for  
writing.  
Check “Create disc”, perform setting for  
write, such as choosing DVD write drive, and  
then set a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R into the  
drive.  
Since a menu is always added to a recorded video,  
the data size of the created video will be larger than  
that of the original video.  
Clicking “Preview” will allow you to check  
any image of DVD to be created.  
Click  
Click  
Click  
131  
[When using Macintosh]  
USING PIXE VRF BROWSER EX AND IMAGEMIXER VCD/DVD2  
Pixe VRF Browser EX allows you to import the images on DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R recorded  
on the DVD video camera/recorder into PC as an MPEG file. ImageMixer VCD/DVD2 allows you to  
use the images imported by Pixe VRF Browser EX to create a DVD-Video (DVD-RW/DVD-R).  
The following shows the basic operations of Pixe VRF Browser EX and ImageMixer VCD/DVD2.  
Refer to the electronic instruction manuals that can be read on PC for detailed instructions of Pixe  
VRF Browser EX and ImageMixer VCD/DVD2. See the electronic instruction manuals for the  
detailed use method of each software program.  
For Pixe VRF Browser EX, click “Help” - “Pixe VRF Browser EX Help” while it is being started up.  
For ImageMixer VCD/DVD2, click the question ? mark at the top right of the folder select screen.  
To start Pixe VRF Browser EX and ImageMixer VCD/DVD2, double-click the “Pixe VRF Browser EX  
for DVDCAM” icon and “ImageMixerVCD/DVD2” icon in Macintosh HD (startup disk) -  
“Applications” - “ImageMixer for DVDCAM”.  
Note:  
The provided software cannot be used to burn a DVD-VR (DVD-RAM/DVD-RW): It is also incompatible with a +RW.  
IMPORTING IMAGES RECORDED ON DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/DVD-R INTO PC  
TO CREATE A DVD-VIDEO (DVD-RW/DVD-R)  
You can use the images recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder to create a disc that can be  
viewed on DVD recorders/players.  
* Any DVD-RW/DVD-R recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder must be finalized  
(see page 108).  
1
Connect this DVD video camera/recorder to  
the USB port of PC.  
To save images recorded on a disc, first insert  
the disc you wish to save into the DVD video  
camera/recorder, and then connect the DVD  
video camera/recorder to the USB port of PC.  
2
Start Pixe VRF Browser EX and choose the drive.  
Clicking the “Drive” icon will display the  
drive select screen. Choose “HITACHI DZ-  
USBHDD” when the power switch is set to  
“HDD”, “Hitachi DVD-RAM DZ-GBX3”  
when it is set to “DVD”, and then click “OK”.  
If you wish to change the import device, and  
continue import, unplug the PC connection  
cable from the PC, and then change over the  
power switch (see page 123).  
Click  
Click  
132  
3
Select the video file to be imported and save  
it.  
4
Start ImageMixer VCD/DVD2, and set up the  
files to be registered.  
The scenes recorded on HDD, disc will  
appear. Select the scene to be imported into  
Macintosh and click “Save”: The save setting  
screen will appear.  
Start ImageMixer VCD/DVD2 and click the  
“DVD-Video” button.  
Clicking “Save” after setting the save  
destination, etc. will start import into  
Macintosh.  
If you wish to import the contents of another  
disc after importing is finished, click “Eject”  
on drive icons: The cover of disc insertion  
block on DVD video camera/recorder will  
open so that you can replace the disc.  
Click  
Note:  
No Video CD can be created or played back on this  
DVD video camera/recorder. And no writing to +RW/  
+R is possible when creating a DVD-Video.  
5
Designate the folder in which the video file to  
be registered is stored.  
Select the folder that you designated to save  
video files, and then click “Add”.  
Click “Options” to choose the type of disc (8  
cm or 12 cm) to create a DVD-Video.  
Be sure to choose “NTSC” for the video  
system.  
After setting the option, click the “OK”  
button, and then click “Next”.  
Click  
When importing video files is complete, start  
ImageMixer VCD/DVD2 to create a DVD-  
Video using the imported files.  
Note:  
When using images on ImageMixer VCD/DVD2, set  
the video saving format to “Program stream”.  
When importing the images on a DVD-RW (VF-  
mode)/DVD-R, click the “Chapter” tab to select the  
image.  
When importing all chapters in a title at one time, click  
“Select all” in the editing menu at the top of screen,  
and then click “Import”.  
When importing the images on a HDD/DVD-RAM/  
DVD-RW (VR-mode), you can use the MPEG editor to  
designate the import range.  
Click  
If you double-click an MPEG file imported by Pixe  
VRF Browser EX on Finder, Pixe VRF Browser EX  
will start, but it cannot handle the imported MPEG file.  
Use the imported MPEG file on ImageMixer VCD/  
DVD2.  
Selecting save destination folder  
133  
6
Creating a DVD-Video menu:  
8
Writing to disc:  
Then edit the DVD-Video menu: You can set  
up the menu style, change the thumbnail to  
be displayed, and add a menu BGM.  
The screen for writing to disc will appear.  
Check “Create disc”, perform setting for  
write, e.g., choosing DVD write drive.  
Clicking the “Write” button will display the  
message “Set a blank media in DVD drive”.  
Set a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R into the drive,  
and then click “OK”.  
After editing the menu screen, click “Next”.  
The screen for setting write will appear: After  
checking the settings, click “OK”.  
Click  
7
Checking playback:  
The playback check screen will appear so that  
you can confirm the DVD images to be  
created. After playback check is finished, click  
“Next”.  
Click  
Note:  
If you load a written DVD-RW in the write drive, a  
dialog “Are you sure you want to delete the contents  
of disc?” will appear.  
Deleting the content of disc will erase all data on the  
disc: Carefully check the content of disc.  
Once the contents on disc have been deleted, the  
cover of disc insertion block on DVD video camera/  
recorder will open. Close the cover following the  
message instruction.  
If the disc contains a video file that does not conform  
to DVD-Video format, the video will be re-encoded,  
resulting in deterioration of image quality.  
Click  
134  
Viewing Images recorded on Disc using PC  
Playing back DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW  
You can use the DVD playback software on your PC/Macintosh to play back a DVD-RW (VF-  
mode)/DVD-R/+RW recorded and finalized on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
1. Load the DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW to be played back in the DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
2. Connect the DVD video camera/recorder to a USB port of PC/Macintosh.  
3. Start up the DVD playback software on your PC/Macintosh and play back.  
Note:  
When connecting the DVD video camera/recorder to Macintosh for playback on a DVD playback software, etc.,  
the screen for setting the drive region code will appear: Set the region code that matches your local area.  
Playing back DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode)  
A DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR-mode) recorded on the DVD video camera/recorder cannot be played  
back, since the OS is not compatible with its playback. Use the provided software to play back the  
disc.  
Playing back MPEG files imported by Pixe VRF Browser EX (Mac OS  
only)  
You can play back MPEG files imported into PC using Pixe VRF Browser EX, on the playback check  
screen of ImageMixer VCD/DVD2, after registering them on ImageMixer VCD/DVD2.  
Since the audio format of the MPEG file imported into Macintosh using Pixe VRF Browser EX is AC3  
audio, no audio will be played back even on QuickTime MPEG-2 playback component and only  
video is played back.  
Note:  
Normal playback may not be possible depending on the disc recorded status.  
135  
Uninstalling Software  
[When using Windows]  
Use “Control Panel” to open “Add or Remove Applications”, choose the application to be  
uninstalled from the displayed list of applications, and then click the “Change/Remove” button.  
Note:  
After uninstalling software, be sure to restart the PC.  
Administrator authority is required for uninstallation.  
[When using Macintosh]  
Manually move the following folders/files installed to Recycle Bin:  
/Application/ImageMixer for DVDCAM  
/User/Library/Preferences/IMxVCDDVD2Preference_HT  
/User/Library/Preferences/ImageMixerVCDDVD2.plist  
/User/Library/Preferences/com.PIXELA.Pixe VRF Browser EX for DVDCAM.plist  
/Library/Receipts/ImageMixer for DVDCAM.pkg  
Note:  
“User” will depend on the login user name.  
Administrator authority is required for uninstallation.  
Please contact the following for inquiries on  
provided CD-ROM  
PC Software Support Center number  
PIXELA CORPORATION  
+1-800-458-4029 (Toll-free)  
+1-213-341-0163  
URL:http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/hitachi/e/index.html  
136  
Cautions when connecting DVD video camera/  
recorder to PC  
Use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/recorder when connecting it to  
PC:  
The DVD video camera/recorder can also use a battery, but if the DVD video camera/recorder  
cuts off during data transfer, important recordings will be lost: If data is being written to disc, the  
disc will then be unusable.  
Do not unplug cables while the HDD/disc in DVD video camera/recorder is being accessed  
from PC:  
If the PC connection cable (provided) or power cable is unplugged while the ACCESS/PC or  
CARD ACCESS indicator is blinking, important recordings will be lost: If data is being written to  
disc, the disc will then be unusable.  
Before connecting the DVD video camera/recorder to PC, disconnect any cables or camera  
accessories (external video flash, external microphone, etc.) other than the PC connection  
cable and AC adapter/charger.  
Use a reference of approx. 30 minutes at approx. 86ºF (30°C) or less for operation when  
connecting the DVD video camera/recorder to PC.  
If the temperature of the DVD video camera/recorder is too high, writing or reading on the DVD  
video camera/recorder may be faulty. And note that, if an error occurs during writing to a DVD-R,  
the disc will no longer be usable.  
Take care that the temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder is not too high.  
Fade, skip or thumbnails set on the DVD video camera/recorder will not be reflected in the  
provided software.  
If the DVD video camera/recorder is connected via USB hub or to a USB port on PC front  
panel or keyboard, the DVD video camera/recorder may not be recognized by PC: If this  
happens, connect the DVD video camera/recorder to a USB port on PC rear panel.  
If the DVD video camera/recorder power is off, it cannot be connected to PC.  
Do not use PC application to finalize a DVD-RW/DVD-R recorded on this DVD video camera/  
recorder: Doing so will make the disc unusable.  
Data may be readable or writable from/to the DVD video camera/recorder using software other  
than that provided with the DVD video camera/recorder, but Hitachi does not guarantee the  
operation.  
If the PC is started from suspend (or sleep or standby) with the DVD video camera/recorder  
connected to the PC, the DVD video camera/recorder may not be recognized: Disconnect the  
DVD video camera/recorder from PC once, and restart the PC.  
Multiple DVD video camera/recorders cannot be simultaneously connected to PC.  
DVD discs created on the software provided with this DVD video camera/recorder can be  
played on DVD recorders/players, etc. that conform to each individual disc, but playback on  
all devices is not guaranteed. They may not be playable, depending on the playback device  
and/or disc recorded status.  
137  
Subsidiary Information  
Introduction to Optional Accessories  
CAMERA ACCESSORIES  
1
Video flash (DZ-FLH3)* (p. 59)  
2
Wide conversion lens (DZ-WL1)* (p. 54)  
2
Tele-conversion lens (DZ-TL1)* (p. 54)  
Step-up ring (DZ-SR3437 for DZ-HS300A) (p. 54)  
When using camera accessories, be sure to read the instruction manuals for each accessory.  
1
2
*
*
Unavailable for DZ-HS300A.  
You will need the optional step-up ring when attaching these lenses to the DZ-HS300A.  
POWER SUPPLY  
Battery (DZ-BP7SW)*  
Battery (DZ-BP14SW)  
*
Unavailable for DZ-HS303A.  
Refer to the catalog for details.  
The models and specifications of the optional accessories shown on this page are subject to change, and their  
production may be discontinued.  
138  
Trouble Messages  
A message may appear while you are operating the DVD video camera/recorder. If a message  
appears, refer to the following table and take appropriate corrective action.  
Messages are arranged in alphabetical order.  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
(1) Data error in a part It is possible that the system cannot normally complete writing of  
of image file. Repair  
data now?  
file when power is turned off for some reason during recording or  
editing (deleting, dividing or combining scenes, or creating play  
(2) Found error in image list). Selecting “YES” will automatically repair the video file, but  
file. Repair data now?  
(3) Data error in all  
image file. Repair all  
data now?  
even if “NO” is selected, the same message will appear when the  
DVD video camera/recorder is turned on next time. (Do not  
remove the disc while the DVD video camera/recorder is  
recognizing it: Ignoring this will deactivate the file repair function.)  
Follow the instructions on screen, taking note of the following  
cautions:  
Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video  
camera/recorder when repairing data: Repair is not possible  
using a battery. If a battery has been attached, turn the power  
switch off once, connect the AC adapter/charger, and then start  
repairing.  
If message (1) appears when using the HDD, a battery can be  
used for repair (except when the remaining battery level  
indicator is blinking).  
Repair will normally be complete in several minutes, but it may  
take longer (up to one hour).  
Data may not be repaired, depending on the timing when  
power was turned off.  
Data may not be repaired normally if data recorded on another  
recorder is mixed in.  
The repaired data may be different from the original recorded  
content because of partial deletion of defective portion.  
Since the date/time for repair is added to the repaired data  
(only the corrected portion for partial repair), the original date/  
time information will be lost.  
Since all movies, and then all stills, are repaired, the order of  
recorded contents will be lost in case of message (2) (3) only.  
See *1 on page 145.  
(1) DVD is not  
formatted. Format the  
DVD now?  
A DVD-RW/+RW that was initialized by PC and not initialized for  
camera use is inserted.  
(2) DVD Format. Select  
record format.  
41  
(Displayed only when  
DVD-RW is used.)  
Auto finalizing...  
Plaese wait...  
This message will appear with a +RW when it is removed after  
recording, or the last recorded scene was deleted. The auto-  
finalized +RW can be played back on a DVD recorder/player.  
114  
87  
Cannot combine scene. Unless consecutive scenes are selected, they cannot be  
combined.  
139  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
Cannot combine scene Scenes in different programs (different recording dates) cannot  
of multiple programs.  
Create PlayList first,  
and then combine  
scenes.  
be combined. Create a Playlist first, and then combine such  
scenes on the playlist.  
87  
Cannot combine.  
Deselect PHOTO  
scenes.  
Select only movies and combine them.  
87  
87  
Cannot combine. Select Select a range of at least 2 scenes to be combined, and then  
multiple scenes. combine them.  
Cannot delete scenes. This may occur when scene that was edited for division, etc. is to  
be deleted.  
85, 87  
86  
Combine the divided scenes, and then delete them.  
Cannot divide scene.  
This message will appear when the scene is extremely short  
because division, etc. was repeated.  
Cannot execute.  
Change display  
category to ALL.  
This message will appear if you attempt to combine or move  
scenes with “Category: VIDEO or PHOTO” specified.  
110  
Cannot execute.  
Unselect multiple  
scenes.  
Division or change in thumbnail was executed when multiple  
scenes were selected.  
79  
Cannot finalize DVD in This message will appear if you press the FINALIZE button when  
HDD mode. Please  
finalize DVD in DVD  
mode.  
the power switch is set to “HDD”. Set the power switch to “DVD”,  
and then finalize the disc.  
108  
Cannot read DVD.  
Check dirt/crack/both-  
Error occurred while the disc was being recognized. Make sure  
that there is no scratch or dirt on disc, that the surface/back of  
11, 40  
sides contrary/inserted disc is not reversed, and that the disc is firmly pushed against the  
correctly.  
turntable. See *3 and *4 on page 145 for troubleshooting.  
CANNOT RECORD  
PHOTOS  
This message will appear when the PHOTO/SELECT button is  
pressed with the power switch set to “HDD” or “DVD”.  
No photo can be recorded on the HDD or disc in this DVD  
video camera/recorder: Use a card to record photos.  
33, 157  
CANNOT RECORD  
VIDEO  
This message will appear when the REC button is pressed with  
the power switch set to “SD”.  
33  
90  
93  
Cannot replace  
thumbnail on PHOTO  
scenes.  
The thumbnail of a still cannot be changed.  
Select a movie.  
Cannot select any more The maximum number of selectable scenes is 999.  
scenes.  
CANNOT SLEEP  
MODE  
The DVD video camera/recorder can enter the sleep/restart  
status only from the recording pause status. The following  
conditions apply:  
No DVD is loaded in this DVD video camera/recorder but the  
power switch is set to “DVD”.  
45  
No card is loaded in this DVD video camera/recorder but the  
power switch is set to “SD”.  
The HDD, disc or card has no remaining space.  
The HDD/disc is protected.  
CARD ALMOST FULL Remaining space is only enough to record less than 10 stills.  
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another card.  
85, 106, 157  
140  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Card error has  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
The card terminals may be dirty: Wipe off dirt, and try the card  
again, or use another card.  
occurred.  
27  
Data other than still image may be included: Use another card.  
Card error has  
occurred.  
Format the card now?  
Was the card formatted on PC? Was formatting interrupted  
midway? When using the card on this DVD video camera/  
recorder, choose “YES” and format it.  
105  
Card error has  
occurred.  
Formatting is not  
complete.  
The card may be damaged: Use another card.  
27  
Card error has  
occurred. Keep card  
inside & restart.  
Card error could have occurred during editing of scenes. Turn off  
the DVD video camera/recorder with the card being used inside,  
connect the AC adapter/charger, and then power the DVD video  
camera/recorder again.  
28, 33  
Card full.  
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another card.  
85, 157  
105  
Card is not formatted.  
Format the card now?  
Was the card formatted on PC? When using the card on this DVD  
video camera/recorder, choose “YES” and format it.  
CHECK CARD  
The inserted card cannot be used in this DVD video camera/  
recorder: Use another card.  
27  
CHECK DVD  
A disc unusable on this DVD video camera/recorder may have  
been inserted or the disc may be damaged.  
27, 106  
Make sure that the type of disc is correct, and make sure that the  
disc is not write-protected.  
CHECK HDD  
The HDD may have been destroyed. Also check to see whether  
the HDD is write-protected.  
106  
107  
Control Information  
Error.  
Mismatch may occur between the recorded image and scene  
information.  
Update the control information.  
Use another disc.  
See *3 and *4 on page 145.  
COPY PROTECTED  
The video signal input to this DVD video camera/recorder may be  
copy-guarded.  
Some prerecorded video materials, such as movies, are guarded  
against copying.  
116  
Copy-guarded materials cannot be recorded on this DVD video  
camera/recorder.  
Dubbing is not  
complete.  
This message will appear when dubbing has failed.  
83, 84  
108  
DVD error has occurred. Disc error occurred during finalizing, and finalizing failed.  
Finalizing is not  
Replace the disc.  
complete.  
See *3 on page 145.  
DVD error has occurred. Has the disc been initialized on PC? Has initializing the disc on  
Format the DVD now?  
PC been interrupted?  
Choose “YES” and initialize the disc when using it on this DVD  
video camera/recorder. Initializing the disc will erase all data on  
105  
it.  
See *2 on page 145.  
141  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
DVD error has occurred. The disc may be dirty.  
Formatting is not  
complete.  
Remove the disc and wipe off fingerprints, dust, etc. before  
reusing it, or use another disc.  
11, 105  
This message may also appear if you insert a disc for which  
formatting was interrupted midway. In this case, use another disc.  
DVD error has occurred. Disc error could have occurred during editing of scenes.  
Keep DVD inside &  
restart.  
Turn off the DVD video camera/recorder with the disc being used  
in it, connect AC adapter/charger, and then power the DVD video  
camera/recorder again. Repair of scenes will be tried.  
28  
33  
DVD error has occurred. This message will appear if disc error has occurred during  
dubbing. Connect the AC adapter/charger to DVD video camera/  
recorder, and set the power switch to “DVD”: Video file will be  
repaired.  
Please keep DVD inside  
and set power switch to  
“DVD”.  
DVD error has occurred. This message will appear when disc error occurred during  
Unfinalizing is not  
complete.  
unfinalization, and unfinalizing disc failed. Replace the disc.  
109  
DVD error has occurred. Use another disc.  
See *3 and *4 on page 145.  
11, 26  
Mismatch in recording information may be caused by editing  
done on some device other than this DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
105  
Initialize the disc or use another disc.  
Initializing the disc will erase all data on it.  
DVD full. Cannot  
execute.  
This message will appear if the capacity of the scene selected is  
larger than the free space on disc. Select another scene, or use  
another DVD.  
83  
DVD must be finalized  
before it can be played  
back on DVD player or  
DVD recorder.  
This message will appear if you remove a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/  
DVD-R that has not been finalized from the DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
114  
See *5 on page 145.  
Drive overheat. Please The temperature inside the DVD video camera/recorder is too  
retry later.  
high, and writing to disc or reading from HDD or disc may not be  
performed normally.  
33  
85  
Turn the DVD video camera/recorder off and wait for a while. The  
temperature will be effectively decreased if the DVD video  
camera/recorder is placed in a well-ventilated spot.  
DVD-R* cannot dub the With a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW, no video can be  
scene recorded in STD recorded with a combination of movie quality “STD” and 16:9  
mode and 16:9.  
mode “On”. Replace the disc with a DVD-RAM or DVD-RW (VR-  
mode) for dubbing.  
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW (VF-mode),  
“+RW” will appear when using a +RW.  
DVD-R*, Different video With a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R, the movie quality mode and  
mode, 16:9 and 4:3  
mode cannot exist  
together.  
16:9 mode cannot be changed in the middle of disc: Change the  
movie to be dubbed or replace the disc with a DVD-RAM or DVD-  
RW (VR-mode).  
66  
66  
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW (VF-mode).  
DVD-R*, 16:9 mode  
cannot be changed,  
when Video mode is  
STD.  
With DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R/+RW, the setting of 16:9 mode  
will not be possible when the Video mode is STD.  
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW (VF-mode),  
“+RW” will appear when using a +RW.  
142  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
DVD-R*, Input Source  
cannot be changed.  
Once a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R has been recorded in the  
16:9 mode, the input source will not be changeable.  
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW (VF-mode).  
66  
66  
DVD-R*, Video mode  
and 16:9 mode cannot 16:9 mode once used for recording cannot be changed.  
With DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R, the movie quality mode and  
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW (VF-mode).  
be changed.  
DVD-RAM, Finalize is  
not required.  
This message will appear if you press the FINALIZE button with a  
DVD-RAM loaded in this DVD video camera/recorder. No  
finalization is necessary for a DVD-RAM.  
108  
85, 157  
105  
END OF CARD  
No more recording on this card can be done: Delete unnecessary  
stills or use another card.  
Error occurred. Please An error occurred with the HDD for which repair is being tried.  
format HDD.  
Initialize the HDD: But note that initializing the HDD will delete all  
data stored on the HDD.  
Error occurred. Please Abnormality has occurred with the DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/+RW  
replace DVD or format  
DVD.  
to be repaired. Initialize the disc before using it, or use the  
another disc. Initializing the disc will erase all data on it.  
See *2 on page 145.  
105  
Error occurred. Please An abnormality occurred with a DVD-R to be repaired. Replace  
replace DVD.  
the disc.  
Finalize may not be  
This message will appear when power is supplied again and the  
complete. Finalize again disc is reinserted after power was shut off during finalization due  
108  
now?  
to a power failure, etc. Choose “YES” if you wish to be sure  
finalizing is performed.  
HDD/DVD ALMOST  
FULL  
The remaining free space of HDD/disc is less than one minute for  
video: Delete unwanted scenes, or use another disc.  
85, 156  
85  
HDD full.  
Cannot execute.  
Delete unwanted scenes.  
HDD/DVD has no data. This message will appear when an attempt is made to execute  
playback or editing on Disc Navigation with no scene recorded.  
HDD/DVD has no  
PlayList.  
Switching of play list was selected with no play list stored.  
99  
HDD/DVD includes  
protected scenes.  
Delete scenes?  
The disc may be software protected from a device other than this  
DVD video camera/recorder. To release this case, use a device  
that has executed software-protect.  
HDD/DVD is full.  
The number of entered scenes has reached the limit that can be  
Cannot add control info. entered, so the control information for generating thumbnails  
cannot be added.  
85, 87  
Combine several scenes or delete them.  
HDD error has  
occurred.  
Initialize the HDD before using the DVD video camera/recorder.  
Initializing the HDD will delete all data recorded on it.  
105  
105  
HDD error has  
occurred.Format the  
HDD now?  
Did you interrupt formatting the HDD?  
Choose “YES”, and then format the HDD.  
Initializing the HDD will delete all data recorded on it.  
HDD error has  
Did you interrupt formatting the HDD?  
occurred.Formatting is Press the RESET button to execute system reset.  
not complete.  
153  
143  
Reference  
page  
Message  
HDD error has  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
HDD error probably occurred during editing of video file.  
Turn off this DVD video camera/recorder, and then connect the  
AC adapter/charger to the DVD video camera/recorder to power it  
again: The video file will be repaired.  
occurred.Restart.  
28  
NO DVD  
This message may appear when the DVD video camera/recorder  
or disc is moved from a cold place to a warm place.  
Condensation has occurred on the camera/recorder lens or HDD/  
DVD drive. Do not remove the disc; leave the DVD video camera/  
recorder turned off in a place as dry as possible for 1 – 2 hours.  
7
The disc has not been inserted.  
Insert it.  
40  
40  
The disc is not inserted correctly.  
Push the disc against the turntable at the center until a click is  
heard.  
See *3 and *4 on page 145.  
Is the disc surface/bottom reversed?  
Check the surface/bottom of disc, and reinsert it correctly.  
40, 41  
101, 102  
No more scenes.  
PlayList was deleted.  
All scenes are deleted from the play list.  
Since a play list with no scenes cannot be supported by  
specifications, a play list from which all registered scenes have  
been deselected will be deleted.  
PlayList over limit.  
An attempt was made to create new play list or copy play list,  
even though limit specified for play lists in the video recording  
standard had already been stored.  
98  
85  
Same scenes on Play  
List will be deleted.  
Delete scenes?  
This will appear when scenes are to be deleted.  
When a play list exists on HDD or disc, an attempt to delete  
scenes in program will display this message. (This message  
will not appear if you deselect scenes from play list.)  
Scene No.xxx is too  
This message will appear during all scene dubbing if the data  
large. Please divide this size of the scene to be dubbed is larger than the free space on  
scene before dubbing. one disc (approx. 1.4 GB, approx. 30 minutes in FINE mode).  
Divide the scene, and then dub it.  
83  
Scenes over limit.  
Cannot add scenes.  
The number of scenes entered in play list has reached the limit  
that can be entered.  
98, 102  
Delete several scenes.  
Scenes over limit.  
The number of entered scenes has reached the limit that can be  
Cannot divide scene.  
entered.  
Delete several scenes.  
98, 102  
Stop processing  
The C button was pressed to stop processing of multiple scenes.  
There was no scene  
which can be deleted.  
This message will appear if you try to delete multiple scenes on  
Disc Navigation when all the selected scenes have been locked.  
Release the lock on scenes before executing deletion.  
85, 92  
The scene from which  
If the power switch is set to “HDD”, scenes with different VIDEO  
Video mode/Wide mode Modes/16:9 modes cannot be combined.  
differs cannot combine.  
87  
The temperature of  
HDD is outside the  
operating temperature  
range. Turn off power.  
This message will appear if the temperature of the HDD in this  
DVD video camera/recorder is outside the operating temperature  
range. Recording on a disc may be possible even if this message  
is displayed.  
5, 155  
144  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
This DVD cannot be  
used. Please replace  
DVD.  
A disc that cannot be used on this DVD video camera/recorder  
has been loaded. Check the type of disc.  
27  
108  
This DVD is finalized.  
This message will appear if you press the FINALIZE button with a  
Finalize is not required. finalized DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW loaded in this DVD video camera/  
recorder. Finalizing the disc is not necessary.  
This DVD is recorded by This DVD video camera/recorder can use only discs recorded on  
the PAL system. Please the NTSC system. A disc recorded on the PAL system cannot be  
replace DVD.  
used on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
UNFORMAT DVD  
The disc is not initialized or it is damaged.  
If this message appears, be sure to initialize the disc on this DVD  
video camera/recorder before using it.  
Reinitializing even a disc used on this DVD video camera/  
recorder may be necessary (initializing will erase all recorded  
contents on disc). If this message appears, try to initialize the  
disc. If the same message still appears, the disc may be  
damaged: Use another disc.  
105  
See *2 on this page.  
11  
UNFORMAT HDD  
The HDD may not be initialized, or it may be destroyed.  
Use AC adapter/  
charger.  
No dubbing, HDD deletion, or disc finalization is possible with a  
battery: Use the AC adapter/charger.  
28, 83, 107,  
108  
Use AC adapter/  
charger.  
Scene cannot be repaired when the DVD video camera/recorder  
is powered by a battery.  
Turn off power.  
If the AC adapter/charger is unavailable in handy place, remove  
the disc, use the opposite side, or use another disc. To repair the  
removed disc, insert the disc into the DVD video camera/recorder  
afterwards, and connect the AC adapter/charger.  
28  
Write protected.  
Check card.  
A card with the erase prevention switch locked is inserted: Unlock  
the switch.  
27  
Write protected.  
Check HDD/DVD.  
The HDD or disc is write-protected. Use the Disc Navigation  
menu to release the protection.  
106  
*1  
This message may also appear when dirt adheres to disc. If this message appears when a recorded disc is  
recognized immediately after it is inserted, do not repair the disc; remove it and then use the provided disc  
cleaning cloth to clean off the dirt before using it.  
This message may also appear when condensation occurs. In this case, do not repair the disc; turn the DVD video  
camera/recorder off, wait until it dries out, and then turn it on again.  
If the repair message appears when you turn the DVD video camera/recorder on from off with a disc loaded  
after recording on it, choose repair.  
If the repair message appears when recording and playback are normally possible with another disc – and no  
condensation occurs and the disc is not dirty – choose repair.  
*2  
This message may also appear when dirt adheres to disc. In this case, do not initialize the disc: Remove it and  
then use the provided disc cleaning cloth to clean off the dirt before using it.  
This message may also appear when condensation occurs. In this case, do not initialize the disc; turn the DVD  
video camera/recorder off, wait until it dries out, and then turn it on again.  
Initialization will delete all data on disc.  
*3  
This message may also appear when dirt adheres to disc. Remove the disc and then use the provided disc  
cleaning cloth to clean off the dirt before using it.  
This message may also appear when condensation occurs. Wait until the DVD video camera/recorder dries out,  
and then turn it on again.  
*4  
This message will appear when a single-sided disc is inserted in reverse. Reinsert the disc correctly. (Insert the  
disc with the label printed surface facing the outside.)  
*5  
Do not insert a DVD-RW (VF-mode)/DVD-R that has not been finalized into any DVD recorder: The disc may be  
unusable.  
145  
Troubleshooting  
Check to see the following before asking for a repair. If the suggested solution still cannot restore the  
DVD video camera/recorder to normal, do not attempt to repair it yourself, but consult your dealer.  
Power supplies  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
Battery cannot be  
charged.  
Is the ambient temperature too low or too high?  
Charge the battery at 50 – 86ºF (10 – 30ºC).  
Is the battery abnormally hot?  
Remove the battery, leave it for a while to cool down, then charge it.  
29  
Is the DC power cord connected to AC adapter/charger? Unplug it.  
Has the battery been unused for a long time?  
Remove the battery, and then reattach it.  
If the battery does not charge after you try the above four  
procedures, it may be dead: Purchase a new battery.  
Battery weakens fast.  
Are you using the DVD video camera/recorder where the  
temperature is low?  
A fully charged battery (DZ-BP14S/DZ-BP07PW/DZ-BP14SW/  
DZ-BP7SW) may be discharged sooner than usual at low  
temperatures. Keep extra batteries on hand.  
31  
32  
Battery may be dead.  
The performance of battery will deteriorate if it is used for an  
extended period of time or frequently: Purchase a new battery.  
The CHARGE indicator Is the ambient temperature too low or too high?  
on AC adapter/charger Charge the battery in environment where the temperature is 50 – 86ºF  
is blinking.  
(10 – 30ºC).  
The battery has possibly discharged excessively. Continue  
charging: After a while, the battery will be charged to the  
specified voltage, and the CHARGE indicator will light. Then the  
battery charge will be completed normally.  
29, 30  
Power turns off immediately Is battery charged?  
after being turned on.  
Charge it.  
When power is turned  
on, the LCD screen will  
turn on and off.  
29  
The ACCESS/PC  
indicator is blinking,  
even though nothing is  
displayed on LCD  
monitor screen.  
Power goes off  
unexpectedly.  
Is Power Save set to “On”?  
If the powered DVD video camera/recorder is left for as long as 5  
minutes without recording or playback with “Power Save: On”  
specified, it will automatically turn off to save battery power. To  
restart recording in this case, set the power switch to “OFF” and  
then set it to “HDD”, “DVD” or “SD”. You can also specify “Power  
Save: Off” to stop automatic power off.  
36  
45  
Is the DVD video camera/recorder set to the sleep/restart status?  
If 30 minutes or more has elapsed with the DVD video camera/  
recorder in the sleep/restart status, it will automatically turn off.  
Set the power switch to “OFF”, and then power the DVD video  
camera/recorder again.  
146  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
Power cannot be turned Detach the battery or AC adapter/charger once, and then press the  
off.  
RESET button of DVD video camera/recorder: Reattach a power  
supply to DVD video camera/recorder before turning it on again.  
28, 30, 153  
Even if the DVD video  
The DVD video camera/recorder will automatically turn on to  
camera/recorder is off, recognize a disc: Closing the cover will automatically turn the  
opening the cover will  
cause the ACCESS/PC  
indicator to blink.  
DVD video camera/recorder off.  
41  
During recording  
Symptom  
Reference  
page  
Cause and Correction  
Pressing the REC  
button will not start  
recording.  
Is input image copy-guarded?  
Is a finalized disc in the DVD video camera/recorder?  
Is proper type of disc inserted?  
Is power switch set to match the recording medium?  
Is the HDD or disc write-protected?  
26, 33, 106,  
108  
Does HDD or disc have remaining recording space?  
Recording starts but  
stops immediately.  
Is disc scratched or does dirt or fingerprint adhere to it?  
Clean the disc. If there is still no improvement, replace the disc.  
11  
Is some other AV device directly connected to the video/audio  
input/output jack of this DVD video camera/recorder?  
If the AV device is connected via several other devices, such as  
AV selector, the video signal may not be transmitted incorrectly.  
In such a case, reduce the number of devices through which the  
video signal is transmitted, or connect AV device directly.  
115  
Are you attempting to record image from video game or PC?  
From some video games or PCs, image cannot be recorded on  
this DVD video camera/recorder.  
No photo can be  
recorded  
Is proper type of card inserted?  
Is power switch set to "SD"?  
Is the card locked?  
27, 33, 106  
Does the card have remaining free space?  
LCD screen is hard to  
see.  
Has brightness of LCD screen been adjusted?  
Stop recording and adjust the brightness.  
38  
34  
Is the DVD video camera/recorder being used outdoors?  
Use the viewfinder. When using LCD monitor, adjust its angle so  
that LCD screen is not exposed to direct sunlight.  
Unevenness appears on Did you press the LCD monitor or the area around it?  
LCD monitor screen.  
If the LCD monitor is pressed, some unevenness will occur.  
Release your hand and leave the LCD monitor for a while:  
Normal display will be restored.  
Focus is not correct.  
Is it difficult to use auto focus with your subject?  
Focus manually.  
56  
55  
Does manual focus icon appear?  
The DVD video camera/recorder is set to manual focus. Focus  
the subject manually, or release manual focus.  
Is the diopter control correctly adjusted if you are using the  
viewfinder as a monitor?  
34  
Adjust the diopter control.  
In cases other than the above, set the power switch to “OFF”, and  
then set it to “HDD”, “DVD” or “SD” again.  
33  
147  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
An error message for  
repair appears.  
Perform repair following the instructions on screen.  
Repair is possible when the DVD video camera/recorder is powered  
by the AC adapter/charger. If you are using the HDD and have  
detected an error in part of video file, a battery can also be used for  
repair (except when the remaining battery level indicator is blinking).  
It will take from a few minutes to several hours for repair. If you  
wish to start recording immediately, remove the disc, and then  
insert another disc: The removed disc can later be repaired by  
connecting the AC adapter/charger.  
28  
During playback  
Symptom  
Reference  
page  
Cause and Correction  
Recognition of disc is  
not complete.  
Is disc dirty?  
Use the provided disc cleaning cloth to clean it.  
11  
Pressing the playback  
button will not start  
playback.  
Has the image been recorded by devices other than this DVD  
video camera/recorder?  
Playback of image recorded on devices other than this DVD video  
camera/recorder may be impossible on this DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
74  
Has scene been edited on a device other than this DVD video  
camera/recorder?  
If a scene recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder is edited  
on a device other than this DVD video camera/recorder, playback  
may not be possible on this DVD video camera/recorder.  
No playback picture  
Is TV input selector set correctly?  
appears on TV screen. Some TVs have multiple video input jacks. Check whether the  
correct input was selected on TV to match the connected jacks. If  
the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to VCR, set its  
input selector to “external input (LINE)”.  
113  
Is the DVD video camera/recorder connected to TV correctly?  
Check the connections.  
112  
11  
Playback picture is  
Is disc scratched or does dirt or fingerprint adhere to it?  
momentarily interrupted. Clean the disc.  
Poor playback picture.  
Was the image input from analog VCR (VHS, 8 mm) and  
recorded?  
The problem may be improved if a VCR equipped with TBC  
circuit is used for playback.  
Playback picture is  
greatly distorted.  
Was recording of external input made with “Frame” specified?  
Specify “Field” for “PHOTO Input” in record functions setup.  
68  
No sound.  
Is the TV volume control set correctly?  
Adjust TV volume control, and be sure to adjust the volume on  
TV.  
113  
Disc Navigation  
thumbnails do not  
appear.  
Was the image recorded from AV input/output jack with  
interference?  
Record image with no noise or disturbance.  
148  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
Photos on card cannot This DVD video camera/recorder can play back image data  
be played back.  
recorded on SD memory card in other digital cameras conforming  
to the DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard. The  
range of image data normally playable on this DVD video  
camera/recorder is that with pixels from 80 horizontal × 60  
vertical to 4000 horizontal × 3000 vertical. If the pixel data is  
outside this range, blue thumbnails will appear (thumbnails* in  
the figure), meaning the image is unplayable.  
Al  
l
scenes  
1/ 6  
PHOTO  
PLAY  
SELECT  
*
Fig. 1  
Even when the number of pixels is within the above range,  
playback may not be possible, depending on the recording status  
of the digital cameras used.  
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) is an integrated image  
file format of digital cameras: Image files can be used on all  
digital devices conforming to DCF.  
It will take some time to When playing back a still, “Playback.will appear: Stills with a  
play back photos on  
card.  
large number of pixels will take some time to appear.  
When the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
No drive icon appears  
on PC.  
The DVD video camera/recorder is not turned on.  
Check the power supply.  
33  
Turn PC off and then disconnect the PC connection cable. Turn  
PC on again, and then use the PC connection cable to connect  
the DVD video camera/recorder to PC.  
Make sure the PC connection cable is completely plugged into  
this DVD video camera/recorder.  
Error occurs in playback If error occurs with USB connection, the transfer rate is not  
of DVD video camera/  
recorder on PC.  
sufficient. It is recommended that you use a USB terminal  
conforming to USB2.0 when connecting the DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
119  
Application is not  
normally run on PC.  
Turn the PC and DVD video camera/recorder off, and try again.  
Error occurs during  
writing to disc.  
The temperature of DVD video camera/recorder is too high due  
to continuous operation.  
Disconnect the DVD video camera/recorder from PC once,  
remove the disc from the DVD video camera/recorder, and then  
turn it off. After a few moments, connect them again and write to  
a brand-new disc.  
149  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
Transfer of images  
stops.  
Connect the DVD video camera/recorder to another USB terminal  
of PC. If your PC is a desktop type, it is recommended that you  
use USB terminal on the back of PC. If you are using USB2.0  
extended card, it is also recommended that you install the newest  
version driver provided by each USB2.0 card maker.  
Is disc scratched or does dirt or fingerprint adhere to it?  
Clean the disc.  
11  
DVD drive built into PC This problem may be solved if you update the DVD editing/  
cannot be used after the creating software of your PC.  
provided software has  
been installed.  
Error appears when  
starting ImageMixer 3. DirectX 9.0c.  
Make sure that your PC display adapter (video card) conforms to  
®
119  
33  
Movies are not  
recognized by  
Make sure the power switch of this DVD video camera/recorder is  
set to “HDD” or “DVD”.  
application in PC.  
The DISC EJECT  
While the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC, use  
button is not valid when Explorer to right-click the DVD video camera/recorder drive icon  
the DVD video camera/ and execute “Eject”.  
recorder is connected to  
PC.  
124  
135  
No sound is heard when Since an MPEG file imported into Macintosh using Pixe VRF  
an MPEG file imported Browser EX uses the audio format of AC3 audio, no audio will be  
into Macintosh is played played back even if the Quick Time MPEG-2 playback component  
back on Quick Time  
with an MPEG 2  
playback component  
adopted.  
is introduced: Only video will be played back. Use ImageMixer  
VCD/DVD2 for playback.  
When the time stamp of The file system of this DVD video camera/recorder is operated on  
file in DVD-RAM is  
viewed on PC, it is  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), and time lag information has not  
been set. With Windows as of January, 2006, the time stamp of  
®
different from the actual file viewed on Explorer looks different from the actual recording  
recording time.  
time. The actual recording time will appear for date/time  
indication on playback screen.  
It will take some time to If you are editing a video file whose contents are different from  
save a video edited on those of project setting, it may take some time, since the entire  
126  
the video editor of  
ImageMixer 3.  
video file must be re-encoded. Reconfirm the project setting.  
®
“Hardware Removal”  
results in error.  
Exit Windows once, and then disconnect the DVD video  
®
camera/recorder. If your PC uses Windows 2000 Professional,  
the problem may be solved if you install Windows 2000 SP3 or  
®
later.  
No USB HS (high  
Make sure that you have already installed the driver provided with  
speed) connection even the USB2.0 card.  
when USB2.0 card is  
used.  
You will need to install the driver provided by USB2.0 card maker  
in order to operate the USB2.0 card at HS (high speed).  
150  
Miscellaneous  
Symptom  
Reference  
page  
Cause and Correction  
No DVD video camera/ Is a fully charged battery attached?  
recorder operation.  
Is the DVD video camera/recorder powered from AC outlet?  
28, 29  
153  
Power does not come  
on, or no operation  
occurs by pressing  
button.  
Execute system reset (press the RESET button).  
Has the DVD video camera/recorder been subjected to impact?  
The DVD video camera/recorder could be damaged. Consult your  
dealer.  
The date and time are  
incorrect.  
Has the DVD video camera/recorder been left unused for a long  
period of time?  
The internal backup memory battery may be discharged:  
Charge it.  
35  
45  
Pressing the SLEEP/  
RESTART button will  
not set to the sleep/  
restart standby status.  
Is the proper disc or card loaded?  
Does the HDD, disc or card have remaining free space?  
Is the DVD video camera/recorder now playing back?  
Is Disc Navigation screen displayed?  
No scene can be  
deleted.  
Is the cursor placed on the scene to be deleted?  
If the selected scene (framed in red) exists, that scene will be  
deleted even if you use yellow cursor to select any scene. Check  
the colors of cursors and bar graph on the thumbnail screen.  
79, 85  
Disc cannot be  
removed.  
Did you detach the battery or AC adapter/charger before setting  
the power switch to “OFF”?  
(Cover will not open.)  
Is the battery charged?  
Connect a charged battery or the AC adapter/charger, and then  
press the DISC EJECT button to remove the disc.  
Did the DVD video camera/recorder turn off because the battery  
remaining level ran out?  
28, 29, 33  
Connect a charged battery or the AC adapter/charger, set the  
power switch to “OFF”, and then press the DISC EJECT button to  
remove the disc.  
Is the power switch set to “HDD” or “SD”?  
Set the power switch to “DVD” or “OFF”, and then press the DISC  
EJECT button.  
DVD video camera/  
recorder cannot be  
operated from remote  
control.  
Is the remote control pointed at the infrared receiver on DVD  
video camera/recorder?  
Point it at the infrared receiver to operate the DVD video camera/  
recorder.  
24  
24  
Is the infrared receiver on DVD video camera/recorder exposed  
to direct sunlight or strong fluorescent light, etc.?  
The remote control cannot operate the DVD video camera/  
recorder when strong light strikes the infrared receiver. Adjust the  
place or angle of the DVD video camera/recorder.  
Is there battery in the remote control?  
Also check the polarities of battery. The battery could be dead:  
Try replacing it.  
23  
33  
Is the DVD video camera/recorder powered?  
Turn it on.  
151  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
Is disc correctly inserted?  
Was disc inserted from wrong direction?  
Remove the disc and then reinsert it.  
Disc cover cannot be  
closed.  
40  
Connect a fully charged battery or AC adapter/charger, and then  
turn the DVD video camera/recorder on.  
28, 30  
Operating sound is  
heard cyclically.  
This sound is heard because the disc is cyclically operated and  
does not indicate a fault.  
Some vibrations are felt These vibrations or sound are caused by HDD/disc drive: This  
or slight sound is heard does not indicate a fault.  
from mechanism.  
No operation can be In the following cases, it will take more time than usual until  
performed because  
the ACCESS/PC or  
CARD ACCESS  
indicator on this DVD  
video camera/  
recorder remains lit or  
blinking.  
After disc or card is  
inserted, it takes  
some time until  
operation is possible:  
Immediately after a disc or card is reinserted.  
When a long time has elapsed since the DVD video camera/  
recorder was turned off last.  
When the temperature is greatly different from the status of  
previous recording.  
When disc with scratches, dirt or fingerprints is inserted.  
When disc is subject to severe vibrations.  
When the battery or DC power cord was disconnected instead  
of following the correct procedure using power switch to turn  
the DVD video camera/recorder off.  
8, 40  
recording is possible.  
No image in viewfinder. Is LCD monitor open?  
No image will appear in viewfinder unless the LCD monitor is  
closed and securely locked to DVD video camera/recorder.  
Is the DVD video camera/recorder set to the sleep/restart  
34, 45  
status?  
Press the SLEEP/RESTART button to release the sleep/restart  
status.  
No image appears on  
the LCD screen or in  
the viewfinder.  
Is DVD video camera/recorder connected to PC using PC  
connection cable?  
Unplug the PC connection cable.  
Does DVD video camera/recorder stop at the end of the scene  
to which wipe-out was set and played back?  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Is the DVD video camera/recorder set to the sleep/restart  
status?  
45, 88, 123  
Press the SLEEP/RESTART button to release the sleep/restart  
status.  
152  
System Reset  
If the DVD video camera/recorder does not operate normally, perform “System Reset”: The DVD video  
camera/recorder may recover to normal. “System Reset” will reset all settings to factory defaults. The date  
and time will also be reset: Set the date and time again before using the DVD video camera/recorder.  
1
2
Set the power switch to “OFF” to turn the  
DVD video camera/reorder off.  
Detach the battery or AC adapter/charger.  
Note:  
Do not press the reset button with undue force.  
Before pressing the RESET button, be sure to  
remove the disc from the DVD video camera/  
recorder: Pressing the RESET button with a disc  
loaded may erase the scenes recorded on the  
disc.  
Use a fine tipped pen to hold down the reset  
button for several seconds.  
All settings will be reset.  
List of setting items  
Setting  
Item  
Default  
method  
Camera Functions  
Setup  
Program AE  
Auto  
Auto  
On  
p. 60  
p. 61  
p. 63  
p. 53  
p. 63  
p. 59  
p. 64  
p. 67  
p. 65  
p. 67  
p. 68  
p. 68  
p. 69  
p. 69  
p. 35  
p. 35  
p. 38  
p. 38  
p. 39  
p. 39  
White Bal.  
ElS  
*1  
Dig.Zoom  
MIC.Filter  
40×  
Off  
*2  
Flash  
Auto  
Record Functions Setup VIDEO Mode  
FINE  
Quality  
16:9  
FINE  
On  
*2  
Input Source  
PHOTO Input  
Self Timer  
CAMERA  
*2  
Field  
Off  
OSD Output  
On  
HDD protection  
Date Set  
On  
Date Setup  
1/1/2006 12:00 AM  
M/D/Y  
Date Mode  
LCD/EVF Setup  
LCD Brightness  
EVF Brightness  
Color Level  
EVF Display  
Auto  
153  
Setting  
method  
Item  
Default  
Initial Setup  
Beep  
On  
p. 36  
p. 36  
p. 37  
p. 36  
p. 37  
Power Save  
Record LED  
Language  
Demo Mode  
Off  
On  
English  
Auto  
*1 “100x” will appear on DZ-HS300A.  
*2 Not displayed on DZ-HS300A.  
Some items will not appear depending on the disc or card inserted.  
Major Specifications  
CCD  
DZ-HS303A:  
DZ-HS300A:  
1/3-inch interlaced  
1/6-inch interlaced  
Total number of pixels  
DZ-HS303A  
DZ-HS300A  
approx. 3,310,000  
approx. 680,000  
Number of effective pixels  
DZ-HS303A  
Movie: approx. 2,180,000  
Movie: approx. 1,640,000 (in wide mode)  
Still: approx. 3,050,000  
Movie: approx. 340,000  
DZ-HS300A  
DZ-HS303A:  
Still:  
approx. 340,000  
Lens  
F1.8 – 3.0  
f = 1/4” – 2-3/8” (6.1 – 61 mm)  
Filter diameter: 1-7/16” (37 mm)  
Thread pitch: 0.75 mm  
DZ-HS300A:  
Auto/Manual  
F1.8 – 3.2  
f = 1/16” – 2-3/16” (2.2 – 55 mm)  
Filter diameter: 1-5/16” (34 mm)  
Thread pitch: 0.5 mm  
Focus  
Zoom  
Optical 10× (DZ-HS303A),  
Optical 25× (DZ-HS300A),  
40× – 500× (DZ-HS303A), 100×–1200× (DZ-HS300A) with digital  
zoom added, 40× (DZ-HS303A), 100× (DZ-HS300A) for still  
Required minimum illumination  
Viewfinder  
0.3 lx in Low Light mode  
0.2-inch color TFT (equivalent to approx. 200,000 pixels)  
2.7-inch color TFT (approx. 120,000 pixels)  
Electronic type  
LCD monitor  
Electronic image stabilizer  
Shutter speed  
1/4 – 1/4000 seconds (movie)  
Still recording only  
Self-timer recording  
External microphone jack  
(Not equipped with DZ-HS300A)  
ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack (a plug-in power type microphone cannot be  
used)  
Capacity of built-in HDD  
Approx. 8 GB  
154  
Recording mode  
Movie (with sound)  
Still (with SD memory card)  
Maximum  
recordable  
time  
HDD  
Approx. 110 minutes (XTRA)  
Approx. 180 minutes (FINE)  
Approx. 360 minutes (STD)  
DVD-RAM/DVD-RW/ Approx. 18 minutes (XTRA)  
DVD-R/+RW  
(per side)  
Approx. 30 minutes (FINE)  
Approx. 60 minutes (STD)  
Maximum  
number of  
recordable  
stills  
SD memory card  
(when using 32 MB  
card)  
DZ-HS303A  
DZ-HS300A  
approx. 18 (in FINE mode)  
approx. 180 (in FINE mode)  
approx. 180 (in FINE mode)  
External input  
(DZ-HS303A)  
Varies depending on the recording quality and the type of card  
(p. 157).  
Recording  
format  
DVD-RAM/DVD-RW Movie:  
(VR-mode)  
Conforming to DVD video recording (DVD-VR) format  
(Dolby Digital)  
DVD-RW (VF-mode)/ Movie:  
DVD-R  
Conforming to DVD video format (Dolby Digital)  
Movie: DVD+RW video format (Dolby Digital)  
Still:  
+RW  
Card  
Conforming to JPEG (DZ-HS303A: 2,016×1,512 pixels, DZ-HS300A:  
640×480 pixels, External input (DZ-HS303A): 640 × 480 pixels)  
standard  
Audio playback format  
Recordable discs  
MPEG Audio layer 2, linear PCM, Dolby Digital  
8 cm DVD-RAM (conforming to DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1)  
8 cm DVD-RW (conforming to DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, 2x speed [2x/1x])  
8 cm DVD-R (conforming to DVD-R for General Ver. 2.0)  
8 cm +RW (conforming to +RW Ver. 1.2)  
Only discs not packed in Round DVD Holder or cartridge.  
Recordable card  
Jacks  
SD memory card  
Video/audio input/output × 1 (DZ-HS303A), Video/audio output × 1  
(DZ-HS303A)  
,
External microphone input ×1 (not equipped with DZ-HS300A),  
PC connection terminal (connected to PC USB port) ×1  
Battery system  
Lithium-ion  
Power consumption  
When recording with LCD monitor off (DVD-RAM used)  
DZ-HS303A  
DZ-HS300A  
DZ-HS303A:  
approx. 5.1W (in FINE mode)  
approx. 3.2W (in FINE mode)  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
approx. 2-5/8” × 3-5/8” × 5-3/8” (66 × 92 × 136 mm)  
(excluding hand strap)  
DZ-HS300A:  
approx. 2-3/8” × 3-9/16” × 5-5/16” (61 × 90 × 135 mm)  
(excluding hand strap)  
Operating temperature (humidity)  
Storage temperature  
32 – 104ºF (0 – 40ºC) (less than 80%)  
32 – 86ºF (0 – 30ºC) when connected to PC  
-4 – 140ºF (-20 – 60ºC)  
Allowable operating altitude (when 3000 m or less  
using HDD)  
Weight  
DZ-HS303A  
DZ-HS300A  
approx. 485 g (without battery or disc)  
approx. 435 g (without battery or disc)  
155  
Total weight when recording  
Provided accessories  
DZ-HS303A  
DZ-HS300A  
approx. 560 g  
approx. 490 g  
AC adapter/charger,  
Battery,  
AV/S input/output cable (DZ-HS300A is provided with AV/S output  
cable),  
Infrared remote control (not provided with DZ-HS300A), Lithium  
battery for remote control (not provided with DZ-HS300A),  
Lens cap, Lens cap string, Shoulder strap, Power cable,  
DC power cord, Software CD-ROM, PC connection cable,  
Disc cleaning cloth  
STORAGE CAPACITY OF HDD/DVD/CARD  
Recordable Time On HDD  
Recording quality  
Movie recordable time  
Application  
*1  
XTRA  
Approx. 110 min  
Best quality  
High quality  
*2  
*3  
FINE  
STD  
Approx. 180 min  
Approx. 360 min  
Standard quality  
Recordable Time On Disc  
Movie recordable time on one disc (on single side) (when recording only movies)  
Recording quality  
XTRA  
Movie recordable time  
Application  
*1  
Approx. 18 min  
Best quality  
High quality  
*2  
*3  
FINE  
STD  
Approx. 30 min  
Approx. 60 min  
Standard quality  
*1: Variable bit recording (recording of more than 110 minutes on HDD or more than 18 minutes on disc may be  
possible because the transfer rate varies automatically between approx. 3 - 10 Mbps)  
*2: Fixed bit rate: Approx. 6 Mbps  
*3: Fixed bit rate: Approx. 3 Mbps  
Note:  
If you record in XTRA mode at high temperatures, the DVD video camera/recorder will heat up and the maximum  
transfer rate will be limited to approx. 6 Mbps, so the best quality will not be obtainable.  
Maximum Number of Scenes that an Be Recorded/Dubbed on One Disc  
DVD  
DVD-RAM/DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
Maximum number of scenes  
999  
930  
254  
+RW  
Maximum Number of Programmes that Can Be Recorded/Dubbed on One Disc  
DVD  
DVD-RAM/DVD-RW  
+RW  
Maximum number of programs  
99  
49  
156  
RECORDABLE STILLS (PHOTOS) ON CARD  
For DZ-HS303A  
Capacity  
Recording  
quality  
32 MB  
Approx. 18  
Approx. 24  
Approx. 37  
64 MB  
Approx. 38  
Approx. 50  
Approx. 75  
128MB  
256 MB  
Approx. 150  
Approx. 200  
Approx. 300  
512 MB  
Approx. 300  
Approx. 400  
Approx. 600  
1 GB  
FINE  
NORM  
ECO  
Approx. 75  
Approx. 100  
Approx. 150  
Approx. 600  
Approx. 800  
Approx. 1,200  
For DZ-HS300A  
Capacity  
256 MB  
Recording  
quality  
32 MB  
64 MB  
Approx. 380  
Approx. 500  
Approx. 750  
128MB  
Approx. 750  
Approx. 1,000  
Approx. 1,500  
512 MB  
1 GB  
FINE  
NORM  
ECO  
Approx. 180  
Approx. 240  
Approx. 370  
Approx. 1,500 Approx. 3,000  
Approx. 2,000 Approx. 4,000  
Approx. 3,000 Approx. 6,000  
Approx. 6,000  
Approx. 8,000  
Approx. 12,000  
With external input (DZ-HS303A)  
Capacity  
256 MB  
Recording  
quality  
32 MB  
Approx. 180  
Approx. 240  
Approx. 370  
64 MB  
Approx. 380  
Approx. 500  
Approx. 750  
128MB  
Approx. 750  
Approx. 1,000  
Approx. 1,500  
512 MB  
1 GB  
FINE  
NORM  
ECO  
Approx. 1,500 Approx. 3,000  
Approx. 2,000 Approx. 4,000  
Approx. 3,000 Approx. 6,000  
Approx. 6,000  
Approx. 8,000  
Approx. 12,000  
(The numbers of recordable stills above are only for reference)  
Size And Quality Of Photos  
The following table shows the file size and quality of one still (JPEG) recorded on card:  
File size  
Quality  
Application  
External input  
(DZ-HS303A)  
DZ-HS303A  
DZ-HS300A  
FINE  
Approx. 1,600 KB  
Approx. 1,200 KB  
Approx. 800 KB  
Approx. 160 KB  
Approx. 120 KB  
Approx. 80 KB  
Approx. 160 KB  
Approx. 120 KB  
Approx. 80 KB  
When image quality is prioritized  
Standard quality  
NORM  
ECO  
When number of stills is prioritized  
(quality will be slightly inferior)  
The quality mode can be chosen when recording stills on card (p. 67).  
Note:  
No still can be recorded on HDD/DVD.  
157  
To Order in the United States  
BY PHONE  
Service Hotline:1-800-HITACHI  
(1-800-448-2244)  
To Order in the Canada  
Choisissez les articles qui vous conviennent et  
passez commande.  
FOR AUTHORIZED HITACHI SERVICE  
FACILITY IN CANADA  
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI  
(1-800-448-2244)  
Please consult the following telephone number  
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI  
(1-800-448-2244)  
POUR COMMANDER DES  
ACCESSOIRES  
(Canada seulement)  
PAR TÉLÉPHONE  
TO ORDER ACCESSORIES  
(Canada only)  
BY PHONE  
HITACHI CANADA LTD.  
HITACHI CANADA LTD.  
DIGITAL MEDIA DIVISION  
DIGITAL MEDIA DIVISION  
1-2495 Meadowpine Blvd.  
Mississauga, Ontario  
L5N 6C3  
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI  
(1-800-448-2244)  
1-2495 Meadowpine Blvd.  
Mississauga, Ontario  
L5N 6C3  
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI  
(1-800-448-2244)  
during business hours  
Durant les heures de bureau:  
Lundi au vendredi 9:00am – 7:00pm (h.n.e)  
Monday-Friday  
Saturday  
EST 9:00am – 7:00pm  
EST 9:00am – 5:00pm  
Samedi  
9:00am – 5:00pm (h.n.e)  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
with FCC Rules for Electromagnetic Compatibility  
Products:  
Models:  
DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER  
DZ-HS303A/DZ-HS300A  
Trade Name: HITACHI  
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
Responsible Party: HITACHI AMERICA, LTD.  
HOME ELECTRONICS DIVISION  
900 Hitachi Way  
Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556 U.S.A  
Tel: 619-591-5200  
158  
Index  
Update Control Info. ................................. 107  
DISC EJECT button .......................................... 40  
Display  
Information LCD ........................................ 46  
Scenes information .................................... 94  
Viewfinder ................................................ 34  
Divide .............................................................. 86  
Dubbing  
Dubbing from HDD to disc .......................... 83  
Dubbing from/to other video devices .......... 115  
DUBBING button .............................................. 83  
DVD player ..................................................... 114  
DVD-R ............................................................. 26  
DVD-RAM ........................................................ 26  
DVD recorder ................................................. 114  
DVD-RW .......................................................... 26  
Numerics  
16:9 ................................................................ 65  
8 cm bare disc .................................................. 26  
A
AC adapter/charger ........................................... 28  
ACCESS/PC indicator ....................................... 43  
Add (edit) ....................................................... 101  
All programs ..................................................... 95  
Auto (program AE) ............................................ 60  
Autofocus ........................................................ 55  
AV input/output jack ......................................... 112  
B
Backlight correction ........................................... 57  
Battery  
E
Attaching to DVD video camera/recorder ...... 30  
Charging .................................................. 29  
Recordable time on DVD video camera/  
recorder ................................................ 31  
Removing from DVD video camera/  
Edit (play List) ................................................ 100  
EIS ................................................................. 63  
EXPOSURE button ........................................... 57  
Exposure control ............................................... 57  
External microphone jack ................................... 70  
recorder ................................................ 30  
Setting Up ................................................ 29  
BATTERY EJECT button .................................... 30  
Black & White fade ............................................ 88  
Brightness ....................................................... 38  
F
Fade ............................................................... 88  
FIELD (PHOTO Input) ........................................ 68  
FINALIZE button ............................................. 108  
Finalize DVD .................................................. 108  
FINE (VIDEO Mode) .......................................... 64  
FOCUS button .................................................. 55  
Format .......................................................... 105  
FRAME (PHOTO Input) ...................................... 68  
Frame advance/Frame back ............................... 75  
Full Auto .......................................................... 58  
FULL AUTO button ............................................ 58  
Full Menu ......................................................... 51  
C
Camera Functions Setup ................................... 52  
Capacity ........................................................ 106  
Card  
Available .................................................. 27  
Capacity ........................................ 106, 157  
Format ................................................... 105  
Handling .................................................. 27  
Quality ..................................................... 67  
Category ....................................................... 110  
CHARGE indicator ............................................ 29  
Cleaning .......................................................... 10  
Color Level ...................................................... 39  
Connecting to TV ............................................ 112  
Copy ............................................................... 91  
Create ............................................................. 98  
G
Go To (during playback) ..................................... 77  
Go To (on Disc Navigation) ............................... 105  
H
Hand strap ....................................................... 22  
HDD  
D
Format ................................................... 105  
Protection .............................................. 106  
Howling ......................................................... 112  
Date and time ................................................... 35  
Date setup ....................................................... 35  
Defaults ........................................................... 37  
Delete (edit) ................................................... 102  
Delete (play list) .............................................. 104  
Delete (scene) .......................................... 85, 101  
Detail (scene) ................................................... 94  
Dig. Zoom ........................................................ 53  
Diopter control .................................................. 34  
Disc  
I
Information display mode ................................... 46  
Infrared receiver ................................................ 24  
Initial Setup ...................................................... 36  
Input Source .................................................... 67  
Available .................................................. 26  
Finalize .................................................. 108  
Format ................................................... 105  
Handling .................................................. 10  
Protection .............................................. 106  
L
Language ........................................................ 36  
Laser pickup block ............................................ 40  
Lens cap .......................................................... 23  
Lens cap string attachment hole .......................... 23  
159  
Linear PCM ....................................................155  
Lock ................................................................92  
LOCK switch .....................................................43  
Low Light (Program AE) .....................................61  
Delete ......................................................85  
Detail .......................................................94  
Divide ......................................................86  
Fade ........................................................88  
Move ................................................87, 103  
Select ......................................................93  
Skip .........................................................89  
Searching for image ...........................................75  
Select (play list) .................................................99  
Select (program) ................................................95  
Select (Scene) ..................................................79  
Self Timer .........................................................68  
Shoulder Strap ..................................................22  
Skip (Scene) .....................................................89  
Skip playback ....................................................76  
Slide Show .....................................................111  
Sports (Program AE) ..........................................60  
Spotlight (Program AE) .......................................60  
STD (VIDEO Mode) ...........................................64  
Submenu .........................................................86  
M
Manual Focus ...................................................55  
MENU button ....................................................51  
MIC.Filter .........................................................63  
Move .............................................................103  
O
Optical 10× zoom lens ........................................53  
Optical 25x zoom lens ........................................53  
OSD Output ......................................................69  
P
PHOTO capture ................................................75  
PHOTO Input ....................................................68  
PHOTO/SELECT button ...............................44, 79  
Play (play list) ...................................................99  
Play (program) ..................................................96  
Play list ............................................................98  
Add scenes .............................................100  
Add scenes (submenu) .............................101  
Create ......................................................98  
Delete ....................................................104  
Delete scenes .........................................101  
Delete scenes (submenu) .........................102  
Move ......................................................103  
Play .........................................................99  
Select ......................................................99  
Select scenes (submenu) ..........................102  
Title .......................................................104  
Portrait (Program AE) .........................................60  
Power Save ......................................................36  
Power switch .....................................................33  
Program ...........................................................95  
Play .........................................................96  
Select ......................................................95  
Title .........................................................96  
Program AE ......................................................60  
Protect ...........................................................106  
T
Tele-conversion lens ..........................................54  
Thumbnail ........................................................72  
Title (play list) ..................................................104  
Title (program) ..................................................96  
TV type ..........................................................111  
U
Update Control Info. .........................................107  
V
Video flash .......................................................59  
VIDEO Mode ....................................................64  
FINE ........................................................64  
STD .........................................................64  
XTRA .......................................................64  
Video selector ...........................................66, 116  
W
White Bal. .........................................................61  
White fade ........................................................88  
Wide conversion lens .........................................54  
Wipe fade .........................................................88  
Q
Quality (Card) ...................................................67  
Quick Menu ......................................................51  
QUICK MENU button .........................................51  
X
XTRA (VIDEO Mode) .........................................64  
Z
R
Zoom lever .......................................................53  
Record button ...................................................43  
Recording indicator ............................................37  
Remote control .................................................23  
Repeat Play ....................................................110  
Reset  
settings ....................................................37  
system ...................................................153  
RESET button .................................................153  
+RW ................................................................26  
S
Sand & Snow (Program AE) ................................60  
Scene  
Combine ...................................................87  
160  
Be sure to read the following before opening  
the package of CD-ROM  
This Agreement will take effect at the moment you open the package of the storage device (CD-ROM) provided  
with this product, if you agree to the terms herein.  
If you do not accept the terms of this Agreement, immediately return the unopened package of storage medium  
and enclosed materials (printed matter, external package, and all others) to your dealer, or return only the package  
of storage medium to your dealer.  
Consult your dealer for any refund on the unused product. However, if only the package of storage medium is  
returned, no refund is possible.  
This License Agreement certifies that you were granted license in the past.  
License Agreement  
Grant of License  
• Hitachi, Ltd. nonexclusively grants you the right to install this program in one computer and use it, but this right  
cannot be transferred to a third party.  
• You can duplicate one copy of this program in a form readable on computer, but only for the purpose of backup,  
and under the condition that the display concerning the copyright remains in the original status.  
Prohibition  
• This program may not be used on network. If you wish to use it for multiple computers on network, you must  
obtain the right of use for each computer from Pixela Corporation.  
• You may not let any third party use this program by granting reuse, transfer, lease, lending, etc.  
• You may not modify, alter, decompile or deassemble all, or any part, of this program or its accessories. And you  
may not allow any third party do so.  
Termination of Agreement  
If you duplicate this program and its accessories without permission, or fail to comply with the above granting  
conditions, this agreement will automatically be terminated. In addition, Pixela Corporation may take legal action.  
When the agreement is terminated, you will be obliged to discard this program, its accessories and all duplicates, or  
return them to Pixela Corporation.  
Guarantee and Immunity  
This program and its accessories shall not, explicitly or implicitly, conform to the merchantability or compatibility  
for your specific purpose of use. Pixela Corporation does not guarantee that the functions of this program will meet  
your needs or this program will be free from interruption or error during its operation.  
Under no circumstances will Pixela Corporation accept any responsibility for any direct or indirect losses or  
damages you may incur from using this program or activities relating to its use, or for any conflict occurring  
between you and a third party originating from, or relevant to, use of this program.  
161  
Warranty Limitations  
Important Notice:  
The Limited Warranty provided by Hitachi does  
not cover:  
Retain your sales receipt for warranty purposes.  
Please complete the section below for your records  
as it may be needed in the event of loss.  
A. Cabinet (exterior finish items), Battery  
packs, Accessories, Lens Cleanings, Head  
Cleanings, DVD Disc Damage, Video Tape  
Damage, or Software Modifications.  
B. Any defect, malfunction, or failure caused  
by or resulting from improper service,  
maintenance, repair, use of DVD Cleaning  
Disks, use of Video Cleaning Cassettes,  
software, or from abuse, neglect, accident  
or any other cause beyond the control of  
Hitachi.  
Attach your sales receipt to this card.  
DVD, VCR, Camcorder Products,  
AC Adapter Charger  
Limited Warranty Registration  
(for your records)  
C. Unpacking, set-up or installation,  
adjustment of customer operated controls,  
user instruction.  
D. Any product with Serial Numbers altered or  
removed.  
E. New products purchased or service  
performed outside of the continental United  
States or its possessions.  
F. Product used for a commercial or industrial  
purpose.  
Model No.  
NO PERSON, AGENT, DISTRIBUTOR, DEALER, SERVICE  
FACILITY, OR COMPANY IS AUTHORIZED TO CHANGE,  
MODIFY, OR AMEND THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED  
WARRANTY IN ANY MANNER OR FASHION WHATSOEVER,  
EXCEPT AND TO THE EXTENT PROVIDED IN THIS LIMITED  
WARRANTY, HITACHI MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTY  
REGARDING THIS HITACHI PRODUCT. FURTHER, ALL  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES RELATING TO ANY PORTION OF THIS  
PRODUCT, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO 90 DAYS FOR LABOR AND ONE  
YEAR FOR PARTS, THE DURATION OF THE APPLICABLE  
EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ABOVE. HITACHI SHALL  
NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY OTHER  
PERSON FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES OR LOSS OF PROFIT OF PRODUCT RESULTING  
FROM ANY DEFECT IN OR MALFUNCTION OR FAILURE OF  
THIS HITACHI PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW  
LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS,  
OR THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO  
YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS  
AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY  
FROM STATE TO STATE.  
Serial No.  
Date of Purchase  
Dealer Name  
Dealer Address  
City  
State  
Zip  
HITACHI  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division  
(“Hitachi,”) warrants this component in duration as  
stated below:  
HITACHI  
Hitachi America, Ltd.  
Home Electronics Division  
90 DAYS LABOR (Carry-in)  
1 YEAR PARTS (Except Battery)  
DVD Products  
VCR Products  
CAMCORDER Products  
AC ADAPTER CHARGER  
For information concerning repairs, operation,  
technical assistance or for referral to the location of  
your nearest Authorized Service Facility or Parts  
Distributor, call: 1-800-HITACHI (1-800-448-2244)  
Conditions of  
Hitachi Limited Warranty  
These Hitachi Products are warranted to be free  
of defects in parts and workmanship at the time of  
purchase by the original owner. If this product is  
found to be defective, Hitachi will repair or  
HITACHI AMERICA, LTD.  
HOME ELECTRONICS DIVISION  
900 Hitachi Way  
Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556  
Tel: 1-800-HITACHI  
replace defective parts at no charge to the  
original owner. Parts used for replacement are  
warranted for the remainder of the original Limited  
Warranty period. For 90 days from the date of  
original purchase, Hitachi will provide labor for the  
repair or replacement of defective parts without  
charge, subject to the following conditions:  
REGISTER YOUR HITACHI PRODUCT  
ON-LINE AT HITACHI.COM/TV  
(Continued on reverse side)  
1. Owner must provide verification of the date of  
purchase when requesting Limited Warranty  
Service. (Dated Sales Receipt Required)  
2. All repairs must be performed by a Hitachi  
Authorized Service Facility.  
3. This warranty is valid only in the U.S.A.  
REGISTER YOUR PRODUCT ON-LINE AT  
HITACHI.COM/TV  
OR MAIL IN TO ADDRESS ON THIS CARD.  
HITACHI  
“In order to allow Hitachi to better serve customer needs, please  
complete this card and return it to Hitachi America, Ltd., Home  
Electronics Division. Completion of this card is not required in order  
to validate your Hitachi limited warranty, but would assist us in  
developing better services and programs for our customers.”  
(Please print or type)  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
Date of purchase  
Customer Name  
Customer Address  
City  
State  
Zip  
(
)
Phone No.  
Dealer name  
Dealer address  
City  
State  
Zip  
VIDEO PRODUCT  
YOUR  
PRODUIT VIDÉO  
VOTRE  
WARRANTY  
GARANTIE  
HITACHI CANADA LTD  
DIGITAL MEDIA DIVISION  
1-2495 Meadowpine Blvd., Mississauga, Ontario L5N 6C3 CANADA  
IMPORTANT NOTICE: This warranty will not apply to product purchased outside of  
Canada OR sold by any organization other than HITACHI CANADA LTD  
AVIS IMPORTANT: Notre garantie ne couvre pas les produits achetés à l’extérieur du  
Canada OU vendus par toute organisation autre que HITACHI CANADA LTD  
IMPORTANT  
REGISTER YOUR PRODUCT ON-LINE AT:  
WWW.HITACHI.CA  
IMPORTANT  
ENREGISTREZ VOTRE PRODUIT EN-LIGNE À:  
WWW. HITACHI.CA  
“In order to allow Hitachi to better serve our customers’ needs, please  
complete this card and return it to Hitachi Canada Ltd. Completion of this  
card is not required in order to validate your Hitachi limited warranty, but  
would assist us in developing better services and programs for our  
customers.(Please print or type)  
«Afin de permettre à Hitachi de mieux répondre aux besoins de la clientèle,  
veuillez remplir cette carte et la retourner à Hitachi Canada Ltd. Il n’est pas  
nécessaire de remplir cette carte pour valider vorte garantie limitée Hitachi;  
toutefois, elle nous aide à améliorer les services et programmes offerts à  
nos clients.» (En caractères d’imprimerie S.V.P.)  
Model No. / N  
°
de modèle  
Serial No. / N  
°
de série  
Date of purchase / Date d’achat  
Customer’s first and last name / Prénom et nom du client  
Customer’s address - PO Box No. / Adresse ou casier postal du client  
City / Ville  
Province  
Province  
Postal Code / Code postal  
Telephone No. / N de téléphone  
°
Dealer’s name / Nom du marchand  
City / Ville  
Dealer’s address / Adresse du marchand  
Postal Code / Code postal  
What are the two most important factors that influenced your purchase decision?  
Quels sont les deux facteurs les plus importants qui ont influencé votre décision d’achat?  
How did you hear about this Hitachi, VIDEO PRODUCT?  
Comment avous-vous pris connaissance des PRODUITS VIDÉO de Hitachi?  
What other VIDEO PRODUCTS brands did you consider before selecting Hitachi?  
Quelle autre marque de PRODUITS VIDÉO avez-vous envisagé d’acquérir avant d’opter pour Hitachi?  
DVDCAM PC Software Support Center  
URL http://dvdcam-pc.support.hitachi.ca/  
Support Center phone numbers for software provided:  
Números de teléfono del Centro de soporte para el software suministrado:  
Numéros de téléphone de l’Assistance Clientèle pour le logiciel fourni :  
PIXELA CORPORATION  
+1-800-458-4029 (Toll-free)  
+1-213-341-0163  
URL:http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/hitachi/e/index.html  
HITACHI AMERICA, LTD.  
HITACHI CANADA LTD.  
HOME ELECTRONICS DIVISION  
DIGITAL MEDIA DIVISION  
1-2495 Meadowpine Blvd.  
Mississauga, Ontario L5N 6C3  
CANADA  
900 Hitachi Way  
Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556  
Service Hotline: 1-800-HITACHI  
(1-800-448-2244)  
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI  
(1-800-448-2244)  
http://www.hitachi.ca  
Hitachi, Ltd. Japan  
This manual was printed  
with soy based ink.  
Printed on recycled paper  
Printed in Japan OR-K(I)  
QR68132 ©Hitachi, Ltd. 2006  

Audiovox CE 100 User Manual
Audiovox Prestige P 950W User Manual
Blaupunkt MONTE CARLO TCM 169 User Manual
Brodit 215003 User Manual
Canon Digital Camera Elph 520 HS User Manual
Focal Access 1 130 CA1 User Manual
Focal Polyglass 21 V2 User Manual
FujiFilm FinePix S4500 User Manual
Hypertec N19568KHY User Manual
JVC GET0602 001A User Manual